Home

2002 cadillac escalade owner`s manual

1. 1 54 If a LATCH type child restraint isn t attached to its anchorage points the restraint won t be able to protect a child sitting there In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint See Securing a Child Restraint in the Rear Seat in the Index for information on how to secure a child restraint in your vehicle using the vehicle s safety belts With this system use the LATCH system instead of the vehicle s safety belts to secure a child restraint 1 55 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System 1 Find the anchors for the seating position you want to use where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 If the child restraint is forward facing attach the top strap to the top strap anchor See Top Strap in the Index Tighten the top strap according to the child restraint instructions 5 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint simply unhook the top strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the anchor points 1 56 Securing a C
2. The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures Towing a trailer Hot outside air temperatures Hauling a large or heavy load Low transmission fluid level High transmission fluid level Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary transmission oil cooler if equipped A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis see Scheduled Maintenance in the Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals 2 75 Low Traction Light If Equipped If you have the Traction Control System this light will come on when the system is limiting wheel spin See Traction Control System in the Index LOW TRAC You may feel or hear the system working or notice a lack of accelerator response but this is normal The LOW TRAC light also comes on briefly when you turn your ignition to RUN If the light doesn t come on then the system may require service have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when the Traction Control System is active Slippery road conditions may exist if this light comes on so adjust your driving accordingly 2 76 Traction Off Light If Equipped If you have the Traction Control System this light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition TRAC to RUN OFF If the light doesn t come on the
3. Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That s normal If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light earlier in this section The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 73 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is working During a majority of the operation the gage will read 210 F 100 C or less If you are pulling a load or going up hills it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250 F 122 C mark If the gage reaches the 260 F 125 C mark it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity The Problems on the Road section of this manual shows what to do See Engine Overheating in the Index 2 74 Transmi
4. English All information displayed in English French All information displayed in French Spanish All information displayed in Spanish Arabic All information displayed in Arabic Display Units English Units displayed in English units Metric Units displayed in metric units Day Date Time The RESET button will enable the operator to reset the day date time Each press of the RESET button will scroll through the following set year set month set day set hour set minutes and set AM PM Whichever is currently selected i e year month day etc will flash The arrow button is then used to adjust the value Each press of the arrow button will change the value by one If the arrow button is pushed and held the value will keep changing until the button is released While in menu mode the SIC will display the day date if no buttons have been pressed for more than 15 seconds 2 96 Language and Personalization Reset O ON DN FW YN peti o S Press and hold the MENU button After two seconds the display will begin cycling through the languages at one second intervals Release the MENU button when the desired language is displayed The previous action will also reset the personalization values to their factory default settings which are as follows Automatic Door Lock Enabled Automatic Door Unlock All Remote Lock Feedback Horn Remote Unlock Feedback Lamps Headlamp Delay 30 seconds
5. Under Second Row Passenger s Seat on Driver s Side A Tool Kit with Jack B Bracket and to lower the jack head Tools and Gloves Wing Nut The wheel blocks E and the wheel block retainer can be removed by turning the wing There is a wing nut B used to retain the tool kit A nut C counterclockwise To remove it turn the wing nut counterclockwise You ll use the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody mounted spare tire 5 21 5 22 ez Lower Raise V2 z Yd Gry Hoist Assembly Wheel Wrench Jack Handle Extensions Hoist Shaft Valve Stem Pointed Up Spare Tire 7 7 FQ Tire Retainer Hoist Cable Hoist Lock Hoist Shaft Access Hole Hoist End of Extension Tool Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire 1 If the vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock 1 open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the ignition key to remove the lock Assemble the wheel wrench B and the two jack handle extensions C as shown Insert the hoist end open end K of the extension through the hole J in the rear bumper Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects into the hoist shaft D the ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire F Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out fro
6. re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight 4 59 Trailer Wiring Harness The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits Heavy Duty Trailer Wiring Package Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal Brown Taillamps White Ground Light Green Back up Lamps Red Battery Feed Dark Blue Trailer Brake A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controller and a trailer battery feed fuse are included with this trailering package See Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness later in this section Your vehicle is equipped with the seven wire trailer towing harness This harness with a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the platform hitch 4 60 Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness Four Wire Trailer Harness Adapter If you need to tow a light duty trailer with a standard four way round pin connector an adapter connector is included in your vehicles glove box Connect the adapter with the tab arrow pointing towards to the top The cap on the wiring harness will lock onto the tab arrow and help hold the adapter in place This harness is included with the heavy duty and camper fifth wheel trailer wiring packages The harness is for an electric trailer brake controller and includes a trailer bat
7. Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 1 22 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt SS om D gt sy io The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These p
8. Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering and Suspension Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the Index Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
9. 83 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Jn heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 100 000 miles 166 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index 6 20 How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the Checking the Fluid Level transmission fluid level if you have been driving Prepare your vehicle as follows When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the Athigh speed for quite a while engine running In heavy traffic especially in hot weather Wit
10. At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl rear compartment hinges outer liftgate handle pivot points liftgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door hinge and folding seat hardware Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to in the Index if necessary turn off the engine immediately if it starts Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The starter the vehicle begins to move
11. C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning lights and gages work as they should NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 6 27 What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 6 28 NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by
12. Install the new engine air cleaner filter you re driving 5 Install the cover and tighten the screws Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the engine air cleaner filter See Owner Checks and Services in the Index 6 18 Passenger Compartment Air Filter The filter is located under the instrument panel below the glove compartment To replace the passenger compartment air filter do the following 1 Remove the bolts on the access panel and set the panel aside Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have it done at your dealer s service department 2 Reach under the instrument panel towards the front of the vehicle and pull downward on the filter retaining bracket 3 Remove the air filter by pulling downward on the element Remove the second portion of the air filter by sliding it towards the rear of the vehicle and then pulling down 4 Install the new filter by reversing the steps listed previously Be sure to follow any instructions that may be included in the replacement filter package Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the passenger compartment air filter See Scheduled Maintenance in the Index 6 19 Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles
13. Overview in the Index for further location information 1 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled 3 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the DEXRON UI pecanse finit with heh lapelis dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle made especially for your automatic transmission down to lock the dipstick in place Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new How to Add Fluid vehicle warranty Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended e After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as Fluids and Lubricants in the Index described under How to Check When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 23 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to
14. Perimeter Lamps Enabled Memory Position Recall Key In Exit Position of Seat Enabled Mirror Reverse Tilt Passenger Alarm Warning Horn and Lamps Display Units English Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist can help you to determine how close an object is to your rear bumper within a given area making parking easier The URPA display is located inside the vehicle on the passenger s side rear upper trim panel It has three color coded lights that can be seen through the rearview mirror or by turning around URPA can be disabled by pressing the URPA on off button located near the climate control system and radio How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph 5 km h When the system comes on the three lights on the display will illuminate to let you know that the system is working URPA senses how close your vehicle is to an object The distance is determined by the four ultrasonic sensors located on the rear bumper When shifting into REVERSE R and an object is detected one of the following will occur 2 97 amber amber red lights flashing amp continuous chime amber amber red lights amp continuous chime A chime will sound the first time an object is detected URPA can detect objects 3 inches 7 6 cm and wider and at least 10 inches 25 4 cm tall but it
15. allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply 4 37 The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course yov ll find experienced and able service experts in Cadillac dealerships all across North America They Il be ready and willing to help if you need it 4 38 Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lens
16. and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Don t drive through rushing water See Driving Through Water in the Index for more information on driving through water 4 30 After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead In remote areas watch for animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older the
17. maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Gasoline Octane If your vehicle has the 5 3L engine VIN Code T use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it is bad enough it can damage your engine A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher octane fuel is necessary If your vehicle has the 6 0L HO engine VIN Code N use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 91 or higher for best performance You may also use middle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher but your vehicle s acceleration may be slightly reduced If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it is bad enough it can damage your engine Gasoline Specifications It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which
18. on the speedometer NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index 5 35 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If your vehicle has the Traction Control System you should turn it off by pressing the TCS on off button If your vehicle has the Stabilitrak system turn the traction control off by pressing the Stabilitrak button so that the STABILITY SYSTEM LIMITED message appears in the message center Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out Or you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index 5 36 Using the Recovery Hooks Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks The recovery hooks are provid
19. s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 1b 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men 4 4 Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in an increasing number of U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after
20. should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N 3 With the engine off turn the key to the RUN If the starter works in any other position your position but don t start the engine Without applying vehicle needs service the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle needs service 7 19 Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P The key should come out only in LOCK Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move 7 20 Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P
21. t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system NOTICE If i it coul l NOTICE you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren t needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries In addition it could save your radio 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground
22. time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information 8 10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa On
23. 1 35 When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag Air bags are designed to inflate only once After an air bag inflates you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag system won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts 1 36 Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information about the frontal air bag system The module records information about the readiness of the system when the system commands air bag inflation and driver s safety belt usage at deployment The module also records speed engine rpm brake and throttle data Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag systems Improper service can mean that an air bag system won t work properly See your de
24. DRL A C FOG LP FOG LP RADIO CIGAR RT TURN Usage Heated Mirrors Left Headlamps Air Conditioning Cigarette Lighter Auxiliary Power Outlets Special Equipment Option Power Power Seats Special Equipment Option Power Daytime Running Lamps A C Relay Fog Lamps Fog Lamps Relay Audio System Instrument Cluster Climate Control System Cigarette Lighter Auxiliary Power Outlets Right Turn Signals Name BTSI LT TURN FR PRK W W PMP HORN IGN C RDO AMP HAZ LP EXP LPS HORN CTSY LP RR WPR TBC Usage Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Left Turn Signals Front Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Windshield Washer Pump Horn Relay Ignition Switch Fuel Pump PRND321 Display Crank Radio Amplifier Exterior Lamps Hazard Lamps Not Used Horn Interior Lamps Rear Wipers Body Control Module Remote Keyless Entry Headlamps Replacement Bulbs Lamp Low Beam Headlamps High Beam Headlamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL Front Marker Lamp Front Parking and Turn Lamp Taillamp and Stop Lamp Rear Marker Lamp Rear Turn Lamp Back up Lamp Bulb Number 9005 or 9005LL Long Life 9005 4157K Preferred or 3157KX 194 3157AK 3157K 194 3157K 3157K For replacement bulbs not listed here please consult your dealer 6 75 Capacities and Specifications Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more informatio
25. FADE Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers BAL Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a cassette tape with the ignition off press EJECT Then insert the cassette tape If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape will begin playing Once the tape is playing use the volume balance fade bass and treble controls just as you do for the radio The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played Anytime a tape is inserted the top side is selected for play first The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO and adjusts for best playback sound 1 PREV Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is
26. LAMP FRT PRK EXPT SPARE 2 PUDDLE LP SL RIDE SPARE 3 INADV PWR CTSY LP CEL PHONE Usage Special Equipment Option Heated Seats Not Used Headliner Wiring Trailer Brake Wiring Power Seats Not Used Upfitter Parking Lamps Not Used Not Used Puddle Lamps Not Used Not Used Interior Lamps Feed Courtesy Lamps Cellular Telephone Wiring Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment near the battery on the driver s side of the vehicle Lift the cover for access to the fuse relay block See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location You will see fuses to the top right of the fuse relay center block once you remove the cover These are spare fuses and can be used accordingly You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor The fuse extractor is located in the underhood electrical center To remove fuses if you don t have a fuse extractor hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out 6 71 NOTE Replace cover after servicing ABS ase Rap ap A STARTER EE TPL B U ee Crer EDE eae ai lt e CA RTTURN Cara 6 72 Name STUD 1 ABS IGNA AIR RAP 1 IGN B RAP 2 STUD 2 TRL R TRN TRL L TRN IGN 1 INJ B STARTER Usage Accessory Power Trailer Wiring Feed Load Leveling Anti Lock Brakes Ignition Switch A LR System Retained Accessory Po
27. Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills Here s what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce 4 20 Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles you have less time to react you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles you ll need more distance for braking especially since you re on an unpaved surface When you re driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you re driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear Safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surf
28. POWER See Engine Overheating in the Index for further information CHECK ENG OIL PRESSURE Message CHECK ENG OIL This message is displayed when the engine oil pressure is low PRESSURE See Oil Pressure Gage in the Index for more information CHECK ENG OIL Message This message is displayed when the engine oil level is low CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL Once oil is added it may need time to drain and settle in the engine before this message will turn off It is best to let the engine cool down if it is hot or warm up if it is cold and cycle the ignition to be sure this message turns off Refer to the dipstick for the correct level See Engine Oil in the Index on how to check the oil level and for what type of oil to add 2 87 CHANGE ENGINE OIL Message This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to be changed The message is only displayed for 15 seconds at the start CHANGE ENGINE Ol L of each ignition cycle When you change the engine oil be sure to reset the Engine Oil Life System See Engine Oil When to Change in the Index SECURITY Message This message is displayed when the content theft deterrent system has been activated and also monitors the Passlock System SECURITY If the security message is displayed continuously while driving and stays on there may be a problem with the Passlock System Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlo
29. a fire and possibly damage your vehicle Do not store papers and other things that burn in your ashtrays To remove the ashtray first locate the indentation on the right side of the ashtray Then place your fingertip in the indentation and pry the ashtray out 2 55 Accessory Power Outlets With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio Your vehicle is equipped with many accessory power outlets One outlet is located in the center console Press the button on the side of the console door to access the outlet The outlet is located on the front wall inside the console Pull the protective cap off of the outlet to use it Be sure to reinstall the protective cap after you are done using the outlet There are also two accessory power outlets located on the back of the center console Lift up on the doors to access the outlets Power outlets are also located in the rear cargo area on the passenger side Pull the protective caps off of the outlets to use them Be sure to reinstall the protective caps after you are done using the outlets Do not try to put the cigarette lighter in any of the accessory outlets 2 56 NOTICE Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working as they should This wouldn t be covered by your warranty Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment and never use a
30. a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won t have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path boulders trees logs or ruts What s beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you don t know It s the smart way to find out Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Don t use more power than you need because you don t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sidew
31. advisor can locate transportation in the event that you are unable to drive OnStar System Limitations Complete limitations can be found on the subscriber services agreement OnStar Service is available in the 48 contiguous United States Alaska Hawaii and Canada available when the vehicle is within the operating range of a cellular provider subject to limitations caused by atmospheric conditions such as severe weather or topographical conditions such as mountainous terrain subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations Global positioning capabilities used to deliver OnStar service will not be available if satellite signals are obstructed OnStar will not function if the vehicle s battery is discharged or disconnected It may also be inoperative if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle electrical system components are damaged Safety and security services are provided by existing governmental emergency service providers OnStar will use reasonable efforts to contact the appropriate emergency service provider and request assistance but cannot promise that they will respond to the call ina timely manner or at all Sunroof If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof To open or close your sunroof the ignition or RAP needs to be active See Retained Accessory Power in the Index Press and release the rear side of the button located in the front ov
32. an advanced computer controlled system has come on to help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you re steering This stability enhancement system activates when the computer senses that your vehicle is just starting to spin as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road It also activates when it senses that your wheels are spinning as they might when accelerating on a road surface that provides inadequate traction When the system is on you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal This is normal When the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message is on you should continue to steer in the direction you want to go The system is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving situations by making the most of whatever road conditions will permit 2 90 STABILITY SYSTEM LIMITED Message The STABILITY SYSTEM LIMITED message will turn on when you press the Stabilitrak button see Instrument Panel in the Index STABILITY SYSTEM LIMITED While in LIMITED mode traction control is disabled and the stability system is less likely to activate To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave Stabilitrak in its normal operating mode not the LIMITED mode However you should put Stabilitrak in LIMITED mode if your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your v
33. and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced 6 55 Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle 6 56 Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your
34. are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year 7 21 Transfer Case and Front Axle All Wheel Drive Inspection Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary A fluid loss could indicate a problem check and have it repaired if needed Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation 7 22 Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Engine Oil Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol of the proper viscosity To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil in the Index 50 50 mixture of
35. be locked with the door key after the doors are closed e Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if the system has been armed If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with the key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the SECURITY message to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm If the alarm does not sound when it should but the vehicle s headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle s headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized service center Passlock Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft deterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system Passlock ena
36. before you can try again When you try again you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears If you lose or forget your code contact your dealer Disabling the Theft Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press the and 4 pushbuttons together Hold them down until SEC shows on the display 3 21 4 Press the SEEK right pointing arrow button and 000 will appear on the display 5 Press the SEEK right pointing arrow button again to make the last two digits agree with your code 6 Press the SEEK left pointing arrow button to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 7 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show indicating that the radio is no longer secured If the code entered is incorrect SEC will appear on the display The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio the radio won t turn on and LOC will appear on the display To unlock a secured radio see Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss earlier in this section 3 22 Audio Steering Wheel Controls If your vehicle has this feature you can control certain radio functions using the button
37. between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco battery When it s time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco battery See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for battery location WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index Bulb Replacement For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer Before you replace any bulbs be sure that all the lamps are off and the engine isn t ru
38. check the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant 6 24 To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface The proper level is from 5 8 inch to 1 5 8 inch 15 mm to 40 mm below the filler plug Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index All Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles However there are two additional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index How to Check Lubricant LF D AN IMPACT OR DRAN PLUSS th JO NOT USE oT WRENCH ON FILL 8 A Fill Plug B Drain Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole yov ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
39. clean drinkable water and use only GM Goodwrench DEX COOL or Havoline DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant in the Index Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid GM Part No 12377967 or equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid Engine Coolant Hydraulic Brake System USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Windshield GM Optikleen Washer Solvent Washer Solvent GM Part No 1051515 or equivalent GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part No 1052884 1 pint 1050017 1 quart or equivalent Automatic DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Key Multi Purpose Lubricant Lock Cylinders Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No 12378261 or equivalent meeting GM Specification 9986115 Power Steering System Chassis Lubrication Front and Rear Axle 7 23 USAGE Transfer Case Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One Piece Propshaft Spline Two Wheel Drive with Auto Trans Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Latch Pivots Spring Anchor and Release Pawl Hood Hinges 7 24 FLUID LUBRICANT DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Fluid Spline Lubricant Special Lubricant GM Part No 12345879 or lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830 Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol GM Part No 12346293 or equivalent or
40. cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution If you have traction assist keep the system on It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road But you can turn the traction system off if you ever need to You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index Even though your vehicle has a traction system you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions See Traction Control System in the Index If you don t have a traction system accelerate gently Try not to break the gentle traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have an anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine un
41. connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 10 11 Connect the other end of the negative cable to the remote negative terminal marked GND on the vehicle with the dead battery Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery If it won t start after a few tries it probably needs service NOTICE Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly To prevent electrical shorting take care that they don t touch each other or any other metal The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable f
42. connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake 4 Open the hoods and locate the positive and negative terminal locations on the other vehicle Your vehicle has a remote positive jump starting terminal and a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use these remote terminals instead of the terminals on your battery The remote positive terminal is located behind a red plastic cover near the engine accessory drive bracket on the driver s side of the vehicle To uncover the remote positive terminal open the red plastic cover The remote negative terminal is located on the engine accessory drive bracket It is marked GND See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco battery installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount
43. continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons 3 12 Press P SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning and listen to a specific preset station P SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in the radio display will show the channel number P1 through P6 for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the pushbutton Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone BASS Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass TREB Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Adjusting the Speakers
44. flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions 4 58 You may also want to activate the tow haul mode if the transmission shifts too often See Tow Haul Mode in the Index When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engi
45. gas can come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the liftgate or liftglass open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate or liftglass Make sure all other windows are shut e Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on VENT or OUTSIDE AIR That will force outside air into your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust in the Index 2 12 To open a mechanical lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise to unlock the liftgate and liftglass The liftglass can be opened using the pushbutton on the liftgate after the doors have been unlocked This can be done by using either the power door locks or the remote keyless entry system To open the entire liftgate lift the handle located in the center of the door To lock a power lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock button and turn it clockwise All doors will lock You may also use the keyless entry system or the power door locks to lock the liftgate and liftglass Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that
46. gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly You should not have to add anything to your fuel Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use it It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the coun
47. gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed 2 80 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic syste
48. green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you
49. if your vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Speed Sensitive Steering This system varies the amount of steering effort proportionate to your vehicle speed Steering is easier at lower speeds for maneuvering and parking ease As your vehicle speed increases the steering effort also increases At highway speeds the amount of steering effort is increased Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the one factor you can
50. ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock Child Security Locks ug t With this feature you can lock the rear doors so they can t be opened from the inside by passengers To use the security locks 1 Open one of the rear doors 2 You will find a security lock lever on the inside edge of the rear door Move the lever up to engage the security lock Move the lever down to disengage the security lock 3 Close the door 4 Do the same thing to the other rear door The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use If you want to open the rear door when the security lock is on unlock the door and open the door from the outside Keyless Entry System You can lock and unlock your doors and liftgate from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this
51. ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active 4 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed Rear Seat Audio RSA This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources including AM FM cassette tapes and CDs through the Rear Seat Audio RSA controller However the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to 3 15 For example rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape through headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones Be aware that the front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls If the front seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to a remote source the RSA will play the same remote source The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA power is turned on You may operate the RSA functions even when the main radio is off The following functions are controlled by the buttons on the main radio REAR DSPL When the main radio is turned on press this button to turn on the RSA display on the main radio Pres
52. in the Index Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index 6 25 How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 6 26 If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you may need to add some lubricant When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1 2 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating in the Index A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129
53. into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 19 Automatic Transmission Operation PARK P This position locks your rear wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK PIRINI D 3 211 100000 It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly Your veh
54. light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing Channels To erase all three programmed channels hold down the two outside buttons on HomeLink until the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Release both buttons Resetting Defaults To reset HomeLink to default settings hold down the two outside buttons on HomeLink until the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Continue to hold the buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off and then release both buttons Accessories Accessories for HomeLink are available If you would like additional information please contact 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com 2 65 The Instrument Panel Your Information System The main components of your instrument panel are the following Zeerene RP geome on we gt Dome Lamp Override Button Headlamp and Parking Lamp Controls Air Outlets Folding Mirrors Button Rear Wiper Washer Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Instrument Panel Cluster Shift Lever Tow Haul Mode Selector Button Audio System Comfort Control System Instrument Panel Fuse Block Hood Release Fog Lamps Button CANADA V Audio Steering Wheel Controls Center Instrument Panel Utility Block Tilt Lever Parking Brake Release Secondary Information Center SIC Rear Window Defogger Button Compact Disc Chang
55. of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And don t connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now
56. of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If your air conditioner is on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 3 If you re in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving DRIVE D If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode listed previously in this section You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away 5 11 Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see A Coolant Surge Tank B Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C Engine Fan 5 12 If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on its location When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at
57. or ice See Rear Window Defogger in the Index for more information The mirrors can also be programmed for personalization For more information see Memory Seat and Mirrors and Secondary Information Center in the Index Curb View Assist Mirror For this function to work it must be enabled in the SIC See Secondary Information Center in the Index for more information Your vehicle is equipped with the curb view assist mirror feature When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R there will be a three second delay before the curb view assist mirror s tilt to a preselected position This feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb when you are parallel parking When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R and a five second delay has occurred the selected mirrors will return to the original position If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted the mirror controls may be used You can also adjust the angle of tilt for each outside mirror by doing the following 1 Place the vehicle in REVERSE R and allow the mirrors to tilt be sure this feature is enabled in the SIC 2 Change the angle of mirror tilt to your liking with the mirror controls The mirrors are now set to the desired position This feature can also be disabled configured through the SIC See Secondary Information Center in the Index for more information Driver s Outside Auto Dimming Rearview M
58. player will continue moving forward through the CD The sound will mute while seeking 4 REV Press and hold this button to reverse quickly through a track selection Release it to resume playing 6 FWD Press and hold this button to advance quickly through a track selection Release it to resume playing lt SEEK D Press the right arrow to seek to the next selection on the CD Press the left arrow to search for the previous selection on the CD The sound will mute while seeking P SCAN Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order DSC will appear on the radio display which will randomly play the tracks on the current CD Press P SCAN again to make the radio display ALL which will randomly play all loaded CDs Press P SCAN again to turn off random play OFF will appear on the radio display CHANGER Press this button if you have a CD loaded into the changer and the radio is turned on to play a CD Press AM FM to return to the radio when a CD is playing 3 19 Compact Disc Changer Errors If ERR appears on the display it could be one of the following You are driving on a very rough road The CD should play when the road gets smoother A CD is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet It is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The CD player is very hot Press CHANGER to make ERR turn off the display If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
59. rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can 6 67 Instrument Panel Fuse Block The fuse block access door is located on the driver s side edge of the instrument panel Pull off the cover to access the fuse block You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor which is mounted to the fuse block access door To remove fuses if you don t have a fuse extractor hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse block access door These can be used to replace a bad fuse However make sure it is of the correct amperage 6 68 C HVAC 1 IGN 3 BRAKE_ LHTRAC C IaNo N CRUISE 4WD TURN RR WPR_ Lws wer SEO IGN Liun tent _ Seo accy Loc DRV UNLOCK LOCK fi LcRANK_ Lar Bag MIR LOCK SEAT DR LOCK PWR WOO Lint prK_ CUNLocK RDO1 Cre 2 NAME L BODY LOCK DRV UNLOCK LOCK Usage Retained Accessory Power Relay Power Door Locks Power Door Lock Relay Power Door Lock Relay NAME HVAC 1 CRUISE IGN 3 4WD CRANK INT PRK L DO
60. required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation 2 PROG Press this button to switch from one side of the tape to the other 3 13 3 NEXT Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation The sound will mute while searching for the next selection 4 REV Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV 4 again The radio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the reverse operation 5 D0 Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise The double D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation 6 FWD Press this button to rapidly forward the tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the forward operation AM FM Press this button to switch from a tape to the radio 3 14 TAPE Press this button to p
61. service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 OWNER S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle Owner s Manual RETAIL SELL PRICE 15 00 CURRENT amp PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle OR ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time Visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt Please allow adequate time for postal NOTE For Credit Card Holders Only service If further information is needed write to the address shown below or call 1 800 551 4123 1 800 551 4123 Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM EST information within 30 days of delivery On returns a re stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1 313 865 5927 www helminc com against the original order PUBLICATION FORM VEHICLE MODEL RICE TOTAL Car amp Light Truck Transmission
62. that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen vii Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE viii Vehicle Symbols Your vehicle may be equipped with components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols used on your vehicle are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator refe
63. the headlamps are on Press the button again to turn them off Remember fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on your headlamps The fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on When the high beams go off the fog lamps will come on again The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is turned off If you still want to use the fog lamps after you restart the vehicle you will need to press the fog lamp button again Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Intensity Control The instrument panel intensity control is located to the right of the headlamp parking lamp knob Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel lights To turn on the dome lamps with the vehicle doors closed turn the thumbwheel all the way up Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition The lights will not come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in 2 41 Illuminated Entry Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature When a door is opened the dome lamps and puddle lamps will come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position If the DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in the lamps will not come on Front Reading Lamps Press the button located next to the lamp to turn them on The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you wan
64. the keyless entry transmitter within five seconds that you want to match with the specific memory number button 1 or 2 you pressed in Step 1 That transmitter will now be matched with the memory number button 1 or 2 and the memory settings that are set for that number 1 6 Heated Front Seats The button for the driver s side heated seat is located on the driver s side door panel The button for the passenger s side heated seat is located on the passenger s side door panel The ignition must be in RUN for this feature to operate To activate the heated seats press the button once for the HI heat setting Press the button again for the LO heat setting To turn off the heated seats press the button a third time An indicator light on the button will illuminate for each heat setting anytime the heated seats are operating The heated front seats will be canceled after the ignition is turned to OFF If you still want to use the heated front seat feature after you restart your vehicle you will need to press the heated seat button again Head Restraints The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle are adjustable Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash To adjust the tilt for either of the front head restraints pull it toward
65. the warning lights and gages See Message Center in the Index Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for about six seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds then it will flash for about 55 seconds If the driver s belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on 2 70 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the air bag system may not be working properly The air bags in your vehicle may not i
66. though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Control System TCS 2 Wheel Drive Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System TCS that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin This light will come on when the TCS is limiting wheel spin See Low Traction Light in the Index You may hear or feel the system working or notice a lack of accelerator response but this is normal LOW TRAC The Traction Control System may operate on dry roads under some conditions When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration This is normal and doesn t mean there s a problem with your vehicle Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration in a turn an abrupt upshift or downshift of the transmission or driving on rough roads 4 9 If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will a
67. to indicate that the player is ready to accept a CD CDs can be loaded or ejected with the radio or the ignition being on or off 3 17 You must load CDs with the label side up If you do not the player will automatically eject the CDs NOTICE Loading CDs with adhesive labels will damage the player To load a CD perform the following steps 1 Press the LOAD button Available positions will blink amber 2 Select a position by pressing the desired numbered button with the amber blinking light If a button is not pressed within five seconds the changer will go to the lowest available position 3 Load the CD when the loading slot indicators turn amber An internal door will open allowing a single CD to be inserted into the changer After approximately ten seconds the changer will be ready to play 3 18 To load two or more CDs perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOAD button The first CD will be loaded into the lowest numbered empty position Load a single CD when the loading slot indicators turn amber After about ten seconds the changer will cycle to the next available position Repeat Step 2 until all CDs are loaded into all of the desired positions If you do not wish to load all of the positions you can cancel the load all function by pressing a button with a green flashing indicator light or by waiting 20 seconds for the changer to time out To eject a single CD perform the following s
68. to the roof and crossrails which can be moved back and forth to help secure cargo Tie the load to the siderails or siderail supports 2 53 NOTICE Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 Ibs 90 6 kg on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle When you carry large things never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle Load your cargo so that it rests on the slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle Put the cargo against the siderails and fasten it securely to the luggage carrier Don t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you re leaving check now and then to make sure the luggage and cargo are still securely fastened Be sure the cargo is properly loaded Ifsmall heavy objects are placed on the roof place the load in the area over the rear wheels If you need to cut a piece of 3 8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load If plywood is used tie it to the siderail supports 2 54 Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding To move the crossrails pull out on the latch release handle at each end Slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing the force side to side Push the release handle back into the latche
69. to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle properly Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals checks inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty How This Section is Organized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services explains what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you want to get the service information see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department or anothe
70. use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you have your oil changed for you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle as shown in the following chart 6 14 RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE HOT FOR THIS WEATHER SYMBOL SAE 10w 30 SAE 5W 30 PREFERRED COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED As in the chart shown previously SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use SAE 10W 30 if it s going to be 0 F 18 C or above These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 NOTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil A
71. vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause an accident If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel Tire Chains Don t use tire chains There s not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s c
72. vehicle to NEUTRAL N Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want oe Te be 5 Have the system fixed as soon as you can 2 27 Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately 2 28 Running Your Engine While You re Parked It s better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan is at t
73. you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot 4 16 Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than o
74. you until you hear a click There are four positions available initial position first click second click and third click Each position will click into place After the third position three clicks is reached pulling the restraint farther will release it back to the normal upright position Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Rear Seats Reclining Rear Second Row Seats The seatbacks can be reclined in the second row seats To recline the seatback do the following 1 Pull the lever located at the base of the seat cushion forward 2 Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it Pull the lever again without pushing on the seatback and the seatback will go to an upright position Folding Rear Second Row Seats The rear seat is a 60 40 split seat which may be folded down to give you more cargo space The rear seatbacks are equipped with rearward folding head restraints When the seatback is being folded down the head restraint will automatically fold rearward to allow a flat load floor for cargo or entry to the third row seating To fold the rear seat do the following 1 Insert the two safety belt buckles into the pocket in the seatback before folding the rear seat on the driver s side That way the buckles will be out of the way when the seat is folded a
75. your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FILL COLD mark If the LOW COOLANT L OW message comes on and stays on it means you re low on COOLANT engine coolant See Low Coolant in the Index 6 29 Adding Coolant Power Steering Fluid If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the surge tank but only when the engine is cool You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot eng
76. 2002 ESCALADE under warranty is backed with the following services Courtesy Transportation 24 hour RoadsideyAssistance 1 800 882 1112 that provides in an emergency Free lockout assistance gt Free dead battery assistance Free out of fuel assistance Free flat tire change Emergency towing 2002 Cadillac Escalade Owner s Manual Litho in U S Copyright General Motors Corporation 2000 Part res 52234 A First Edition All Rights Reserved Seats and Seat Controls Safety Belts Windows Keys and Door Locks Remote Keyless Entry System Liftgate Automatic Transmission Parking Brake Tilt W heel Turn Signal M ultifunction Lever Windshield Wipers Cruise Control Exterior and Interior Lamps Table of Contents Seats and Restraint Systems Air Bag Systems Restraint Systems for Children Features and Controls VYYYVYVVYVVVYVY Mirrors Storage Compartments Convenience Net Accessory Power Outlets OnStar System If Equipped Sunroof If Equipped HomeLink Transmitter Instrument Panel Warning Lights and Gages Secondary Information Center SIC Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA D Table of Contents cont d Section 4 E Comfort Controls and Audio Systems Heating and Air Conditioning Radio Theft Deterrent Feature Radio Cassette Player CD Changer Steering Whee
77. Blades Cleaning in the Index Spare Tire Check At least twice a year after the monthly inflation check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to the correct tire inflation pressure make sure that the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench ratchet to tighten the cable See Storing the Spare Tire and Tools in the Index Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check Your vehicle has an indicator located on the air cleaner in the engine compartment that lets you know when the air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed Check indicator at least twice a year or when your engine oil is changed whichever occurs first See Air Cleaner in the Index for more information Inspect your air cleaner filter restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is used in dusty areas or under off road conditions 7 18 Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transmission Fluid in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed
78. GE ACTUAL ENGINE OIL CHANGE 7 7 Scheduled Maintenance ENGINE OIL CHANGE 7 8 Scheduled Maintenance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Replace passenger compartment air filter If you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 9 Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Replace passenger compartment air filter If you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filte
79. Haul Light TOW HAUL United States Canada This light is displayed when the tow haul mode has been activated For more information see Tow Haul Mode in the Index 2 82 Fuel Gage United States Canada The fuel gage when the ignition is on tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel and you should get more fuel as soon as possible Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage At the gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the ignition Message Center The message center is located on the left side of the instrument panel cluster It gives you important safety and maintenance facts When you turn the ignition on the entire center lights up for just a few seconds As needed the message center will display one of the following messages The message center is capable of alternating among different messages if needed It gives you important safety and maintenance facts Battery Message If this message is displayed w
80. OR BRAKE RR WIPER ILLUM SEAT TURN UNLOCK HTR A C Usage Climate Control System Cruise Control Instrument Cluster Ignition Power Seats Not Used Starting System Interior Lamps Power Door Lock Relay Anti Lock Brake System Rear Window Wiper Interior Lamps Power Seat Circuit Breaker Exterior Lamps Turn Signals Hazard Lamps Power Door Locks Climate Control System NAME WS WPR IGN 1 AIR BAG MIR LOCK DR LOCK PWR WDO UNLOCK IGN 0 SEO IGN SEO ACCY RAP 1 RDO 1 RAP 2 Usage Windshield Wipers Ignition Instrument Panel Air Bag Power Mirrors Power Door Locks Power Door Locks Power Window Circuit Breaker Power Door Lock Relay PRND3721 Display Odometer VCM PCM Special Equipment Option Ignition Special Equipment Option Accessory Cellular Telephone Retained Accessory Power Relay Audio System Rear Power Windows Sunroof Radio 6 69 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel utility block is located underneath the instrument panel to the left of the steering column some ee en cee f soem SEO TRAILER UPF SPARE 2 SPARE 3 HTDST f PWRST QO INADV l i PWR Lo Lt Park Ld SPARE 4 YE9 MNP y PUDDLE LP te VANITY SLRIDE CEL PHONE CJ Cc T 6 70 Relay Name SEO HTD ST SPARE 4 VANITY TRAILER PWR ST YE9 UPF PARK
81. R system as described in the service manual An Emission Control Service See footnote Inspect Evaporative Control System Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve works properly if equipped Replace as needed An Emission Control Service See footnote 67 500 Miles 112 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant ACTUAL SERVICED BY ERVICED BY velocity joints and axle seals for leaking MILEAGE SERVIC Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper a e rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Replace passenger compartment air filter If you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often MILEAGE SERVIC Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant o e E velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 13 Scheduled Maintenance 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern
82. Tire G Tire Retainer H Hoist Cable To store the tools follow these procedures Under Driver s Side Rear Seat A Tool Kit with Jack Tools and Gloves B Bracket and Wing Nut 5 33 A Speaker B Bottle Jack C Wing Nut 5 34 Turn Counter Clockwise a Remove Pa Rear Access Panel D Retaining Hook E Wheel Blocks F Cover Panel F Put the tool kit with the jack tools and gloves in the tool bag and place in the retaining clip under the driver s side second seat Tighten down with the wing nut Then assemble wheel blocks and bottle jack together with the wing nut and retaining hook Position behind the jack storage cover in the left rear side panel just below the speaker and tighten adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown
83. Unit Repair lomersanai id NOTE Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name and also the Check or Money name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent Order payable to Michigan Purchasers Mail completed order form to Helm Inc USA funds add 6 sales tax HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 only do not send cash U S Order Processing 6 50 For purchases outside U S A please write to the above address for quotation n I MasterCard Canadian customers add 3 00 to U S C order processing VISA CUSTOMER S NAME ATTENTION E j Discover SS Account STREET ADDRESS NO P O BOX NUMBERS Niuma are Check here if your billing address eo lt lt lt lt lt gt lt i Expiration el Eo is different from your shipping CITY STATE ZIP CODE Date mo yr address shown DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO Vi Le AREA CODE CUSTOMER SIGNATURE GM CAD ORD99 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents obligation Allow ample time for delivery are to make checks payable in U S funds
84. a low gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and they won t have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times A Set the parking brake put your transmission in PARK P and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you ll want to consider a number of things How steep is the downhill Will I be able to maintain vehicle control cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control What s the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders What s at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks 4 25 Q Are there some things I should not do when Q Am I likely to stall when going downhill ae 9 come count A It s much more likely to happen going uphill But if A Yes These are important because if you it happens going downhill here s what to do ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident When driving downhill avoid turns that take you acros
85. aces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you re not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider Is the path ahead clear Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There s more discussion of these subjects later Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you re not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you can t control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or si
86. air turn the knob counterclockwise toward blue 3 5 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems with Electronic Climate Control System Without Sunroof COMPUTER CUMATE CONTHOL Rear Control With this system the rear passengers can control the air temperature air flow and air speed The climate control has three knobs 3 6 To adjust the airflow speed turn the fan knob located on the left side of the control panel to the desired setting The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear controls Choosing AUTO from the front will control the rear settings Choosing OFF from the front control will also turn off the rear climate control When the front control is set to REAR the rear controls can be used by rear seat passengers To adjust the air temperature on either control panel turn the temperature knob on the center of the control panel For warmer air turn the knob clockwise toward 82 Turn the knob counterclockwise toward 66 for cooler air To regulate the airflow direction adjust the right knob on the control panel Turn the knob clockwise for floor vent airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent airflow Generally the upper vents are used for air conditioning and the floor vents for heating The knob can be set to any blend setting Air Conditioning On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot air inside escape This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool d
87. aler for service NOTICE If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s air bag or the air bag covering on the driver s and right front passenger s seatback the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag or both the air bag module and seatback for the driver s and right front passenger s side impact air bag Do not open or break the air bag coverings Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag systems in several places around your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag systems To purchase a service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag systems Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Q If I add a push bumper or bicycle
88. all that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt if your vehicle has one Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 65 1 66 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around y
89. also choose not to have the perimeter lights come on See Secondary Information Center in the Index for more information LOCK Pressing this button once will lock all of the doors Pressing the button again within three seconds will cause the horn to chirp You can choose different feedback options for each press of the LOCK button See Secondary Information Center SIC in the Index for more information Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact with the theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent and Secondary Information Center SIC in the Index for more information Remote Panic Alarm When the button with the horn symbol on the keyless entry transmitter is pressed the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again waiting for 30 seconds or starting the vehicle OnStar Alarm Auto Notification If Equipped OnStar may dial in to the OnStar center to report an alarm activation if the alarm is sounded for more than five seconds Recalling Seat and Mirror Memory Settings You can recall seat and mirror positions using your keyless entry transmitter See Memory Seat and Memory Mirrors in the Index for more information 2 10 Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmit
90. and additional information See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Replace passenger compartment air filter If you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 14 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Scheduled Maintenance 97 500 Miles 162 500 km velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper fF Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant Ee SERVICED BY rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km i ee Replace spark plugs Oooo ooo O An Emission Control Service Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi
91. aning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs e After five seconds the display does not show a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly In order to calibrate the letters CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows If CAL is not displayed push in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds or until the letter CAL is displayed The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction or drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after several turns the compass will become calibrated and will display a direction Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adj
92. any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 44 Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels u
93. aring can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it 3 23 To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following e Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly NOTICE Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio be sure you can add what you want If you can it s very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may also interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly So before adding sound equipment check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units 3 24 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use Your radio may
94. arking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R 4 24 As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This won t work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you can t make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Q Suppose after stalling I try to back down the hill and decide I just can t do it What should I do If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use
95. arts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash 1 23 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body OOF E P A al F A SQ The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way 1 24 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 25 Q What s wrong with this The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 26 You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen Q What s w
96. ating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your truck can carry Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they ll keep going Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier thing
97. ator pedal You Il now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from ON to R A Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch to R A briefly Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Press and hold the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button briefly Each time you do this you Il go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower 2 36 Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal Mov
98. aul Mode in the Index for more information The tow haul mode also interacts with the Autoride feature to enhance the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle See Autoride in the Index 2 23 Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will flash A chime will activate when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 3 mph 5 km h for at least three seconds BRAKE RELEASE 2 24 To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the bottom edge of the lever located above the parking brake pedal marked BRAKE RELEASE to release the parking brake If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light will go off NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving Shifting Into PARK P 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P position like this It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle ca
99. ays and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you re there Use your headlamps even during the day They make you more visible to oncoming traffic Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert 4 23 Q What should I do if my vehicle stalls or is about to stall and I can t make it up the hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here s what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you ll need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the p
100. ble 3 2 Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel is used to select the desired air temperature in your vehicle This knob will allow you to adjust the interior air temperature independent of the mode knob setting Move the knob clockwise toward 82 for warmer air Move the knob counterclockwise toward 66 for cooler air When the system is set for automatic operation sensors will control the fan speed Full Hot If you turn the temperature knob past 82 the system will go into the full hot mode The system will remain at that maximum heating setting and the fan will blow at the speed to which the fan knob is set If the fan is in AUTO it will run at full speed Full Cold If you turn the temperature knob past 66 the system will go into the full cold mode The system will remain at that maximum cooling setting and the fan will blow at the speed to which the fan knob is set If the fan is in AUTO it will run at full speed Mode Knob Automatic Operation The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery When the system is set in AUTO mode sensors will control the air delivery mode Air will come primarily from the floor or instrument panel outlets with some air directed to the windshield to prevent fogging When the system is in AUTO mode the air conditioning light will turn on and the recirculation and outside air lights turn off With the system in full auto con
101. bled You would do the following 1 First press the MENU button until you reach the Automatic Door Lock screen 2 Next press the arrow button until you find the Disabled setting 3 The setting is now actually set without having to do anything else You can do one of three things at this point You can leave the personalization mode by pressing FUEL or TRIP You can just let the SIC exit the personalization mode on its own by waiting approximately 15 seconds without touching any buttons or you can press the MENU key to move on to the next programmable feature The following is a list of the personal settings that can be changed Automatic Door Lock Enabled Doors automatically lock when transmission is shifted out of PARK P Disabled Doors do not lock automatically 2 93 Automatic Door Unlock Driver Driver s door unlocks when transmission is shifted into PARK P All All doors unlock when transmission is shifted into PARK P Disabled Doors do not unlock automatically Remote Lock Feedback Horn Horn chirps on second press of the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter Lamps Parking lamps flash on each press of the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter Horn and Lamps Parking lamps flash on each press horn chirps on second press of LOCK on the keyless entry transmitter None No horn or lamp feedback to the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter Remot
102. bles fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with fuel is disabled If the engine stalls and the SECURITY message flashes wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine is running and the SECURITY message comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time You may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index See your dealer for service In an emergency call the Cadillac Roadside Service Center See Roadside Service in the Index 2 15 New Vehicle Break In NOTICE Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this break
103. button and 000 will appear on the display 6 Press the SEEK right pointing arrow button again to make the last two digits agree with your code 7 Press the SEEK left pointing arrow button to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 8 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code 9 Press AM FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure The LED indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition on LOC will appear on the display 2 Press the SEEK right pointing arrow button and 000 will appear on the display 3 Press the SEEK right pointing arrow button again to make the last two digits agree with your code 4 Press the SEEK and left pointing arrow button to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 5 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show SEC indicating the radio is now operable and secure If you enter the wrong code eight times INOP will appear on the display You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on
104. can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline Checking Things Under the Hood Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood first pull the handle inside the vehicle located under and to the left of the steering wheel Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the secondary hood release located near t
105. can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle NOTICE Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section If yours was built with trailering options as many are it s ready for heavier trailers But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different la
106. cannot detect objects that are above the center of the Cadillac crest badge In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object it must be within operating range 2 98 If the URPA system is not functioning properly the display will flash red indicating that there is a problem The light will also flash red while driving if a trailer or trailer hitch ball mount is attached to your vehicle or if a bicycle or object is on the back of or hanging out of your vehicle The light will continue to flash until the trailer or the object is removed and your vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph 25 km h It may also flash red if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud dirt snow ice and slush or the system may not work properly If after cleaning the rear bumper and driving forward at least 15 mph 25 km h the display continues to flash red see your dealer It may also flash red if your vehicle is moving in REVERSE R at a speed greater than 3 mph 5 km h Other conditions that may affect system performance include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck As always drivers should use care when backing up a vehicle Always look behind you being sure to check for other vehicles obstructions and blind spots For cleaning instructions see Cleaning Your Vehicle in the Index 1 Section 3 Comfort Control
107. ch may cause damage to the headlamp 5 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp Turn the vertical aiming screw V until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line The top edge of the cut off should be positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line 6 45 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Daytime Running Lamps A G A Low Beam Headlamp B Daytime Running Lamp C Sidemarker Lamp D High Beam Headlamp E Front Turn Signal Lamp 6 46 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as described previously 2 Remove the rubber circular shaped bulb cap for the affected bulb from the headlamp assembly 3 Press the locking release lever turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp assembly There is no lock for the sidemarker lamp 4 Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket 5 Put the new bulb into the bulb socket 6 Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing and turn it clockwise until it locks Use care not to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands There is no lock for the sidemarker lamp 7 Reinstall the rubber circular shaped bulb cap to the headlamp assembly 8 Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle by reversing the previous mentioned steps Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL It is recommended that this component be replaced as a unit Taillamps Turn Signal Tail Lamp St
108. ck and you should see your dealer 2 88 LOW WASHER FLUID Message LOW WASHER This message is displayed when the vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid The message is only displayed for 15 seconds each ignition cycle FLUID For more information see Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index SERVICE RIDE CONTROL Message This message is displayed when a possible problem exists with the Autoride system SERVICE RIDE CONTROL For more information see Autoride in the Index CARGO DOOR AJAR Message This message is displayed when the rear liftglass or liftgate is ajar when the ignition is in RUN LOW FUEL Message This message is displayed when your vehicle is low LOW on fuel FUEL Refer to the fuel gage for a better indication of the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM Message SERVICE i any STABILITY SYSTEM message it means there may be a problem with your stability enhancement system SYSTEM If you see this message try to reset the system stop turn off the engine then start the engine again If the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer for service Reduce your speed and drive accordingly 2 89 STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE Message You may see the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the message center STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE It means that
109. control Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control Refer to Traction Control System in the Index What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down If you have Stabilitrak you may see the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the message center See STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE Message in the Index Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway 4 13 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in fr
110. control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally 4 33 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining 4 34 Driving Through Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Driving Through Flowing Water Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a lo
111. corrected please contact your dealer Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored If ignored the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature If THEFTLOCK is activated your radio will not operate if stolen 3 20 When THEFTLOCK is activated the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power has been interrupted If your battery loses power for any reason you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate Activating the Theft Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4 1 Write down any three or four digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle 2 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN Turn the radio off W 4 Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons together Hold them down until shows on the display Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down 5 Press the SEEK right pointing arrow
112. could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years about 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker
113. covery 4 45 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 15 Passing 4 48 Loading Your Vehicle 4 17 Loss of Control 4 50 Level Control 4 18 Operating Your All Wheel Drive Vehicle 4 50 Towing a Trailer Off Paved Roads Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index gt Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques
114. crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle 6 53 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards 6 54 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
115. d Restraint in a Center Rear Seat Position You ll be using the lap belt Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt Put the restraint on the seat Run the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how lt a 1 59 1 60 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To tighten the belt pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the
116. d following the applicable service manual removal installation procedure Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission through the opening created by removing the propeller shaft if proper protection is not provided Also check the transmission fluid level before driving the truck When the vehicle is properly attached to the dolly and tow vehicle and is ready to be towed turn the ignition to LOCK To prevent the battery from draining remove the IGN 0 fuse from the instrument panel fuse block See Fuses in the Index for more information about removing the IGN 0 fuse NOTICE Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Don t tow an all wheel drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground 4 47 Loading Your Vehicle GAWR FRT Cc RIM COLD TIRE PRESSURE Cc Co The Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle Document in the cab The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo 4 48 The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight R
117. d position and slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure the latch snaps securely into place e If you need to carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as they will go Tie the load to the crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports Also tie the load to the bumpers Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged For the purpose of wind noise reduction locate the front crossrail approximately 18 to 24 inches 46 cm to 58 cm rearward of the front supports After moving a crossrail be sure it is securely locked into the siderail Your vehicle has a Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL located above the rear glass If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle care should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter To use the cigarette lighter push it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself Front Ashtray The front ashtray is located in the center console Press the raised area on the access door to use the ashtray Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand If you store paper or other things that burn in your ashtrays they could be set on fire by while it s heating can make it overload damaging the lighter and the heating element Just push the lighter all the way in and let go When it s done it will pop back by itself cigarettes or other smoking materials That could cause
118. dditives Don t add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to change your engine oil This is not based on mileage but on engine revolutions and engine operating temperature When the computer has calculated that the oil needs changing the GM Oil Life System will indicate that a change is necessary The mileage between oil and filter changes will vary depending on how you drive your vehicle usually between 3 000 miles 5 000 km and 10 000 miles 16 000 km since your last oil and filter change Under severe conditions the system may come on before 3 000 miles 5 000 km Never drive your vehicle more than 10 000 miles 16 000 km or 12 months whichever occurs first without an oil change The system won t detect dust in the oil So if you drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or sooner Remember to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message whenever the oil is changed 6 15 How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Message To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message do the following 1 Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message flashes for five seconds the system is reset If the
119. de temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 11 Scheduled Maintenance 52 500 Miles 87 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Replace passenger compartment air filter If you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 12 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Scheduled Maintenance Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation EG
120. dent If you don t shift down your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action 4 40 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for winter You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle 4 41 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful 4 42 What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very
121. der straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps 1 50 A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors therefore recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older chi
122. device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See the instructions that follow If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Operation UNLOCK Pressing this button once will unlock the driver s door The interior lights will come on and the parking lamps will flash Pressing UNLOCK again within three seconds will cause the remaining doors to unlock The interior lights will come on The vehicle s perimeter lights headlamps parking lamps and puddle lamps will also come on if programmed in the SIC You can choose different feedback options for each press of the UNLOCK button and you can
123. display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer GM Part No 12344789 When using a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time When the cleaning cassette has been
124. driver 1 or driver 2 do the following 1 Select the desired driver number by pressing the 1 or 2 button 2 Move the seat to the desired position Press and hold the Exit button of the memory control for three seconds When you hear a chime ring two times the exit position is stored for the identified driver driver 1 or 2 To use the exit feature press the Exit button on the memory seat controls If you have the exit feature enabled in the secondary information center then removing the key from the ignition will cause the seat to move to the preset exit position without having to press the Exit button See Secondary Information Center in the Index for more information 1 5 Keyless Entry Transmitter Seat and Mirror Memory Recall For this function to work it must be enabled in the secondary information system See Secondary Information Center in the Index for more information You can program both of your keyless entry transmitters to work the settings you have chosen for driver 1 or driver 2 Once a transmitter is programmed pressing the UNLOCK button will recall the memory functions chosen for that transmitter To match a transmitter do the following 1 Press and hold the desired number button 1 or 2 on the memory controls until the seat and mirror positions are set You will hear a chime ring twice Continue holding the number button 2 While still holding the memory number button press UNLOCK on
125. e compartment of the armrest you will find two sets of earbud headphones which can be used for the rear seat audio The headphones plug into the rear seat audio jacks provided in the back of the center console See Rear Seat Audio in the Index for more information 1 10 Entry Exit to from the Third Row Seat To enter or exit the third row seat you must fold the second row seat down following the instructions given previously If you are exiting the third row seat with no assistance do the following 1 Reach over the second row seat and pull up on the strap loop and then pull the seat cushion up and push it forward 2 Next push the seatback forward until it is flat with the floor Be sure to return the seat to the passenger position when you are finished Pull forward and push rearward on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place Folding the Third Row Seat Returning the Seat s to an Upright Position To fold the seatbacks do the following To return the seatback to an upright position do the following 1 Pull up on the release lever labeled 1 located 1 Pull up on the release on the rear of the seatback and push the seatback forward lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the seatback or the assist strap located on the outboard side of the seat until the seatback locks into the upright position 2 Push forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked into position 1 11 Tiltin
126. e Unlock Feedback Horn Horn chirps on second press of the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter Lamps Parking lamps flash on each press of the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter 2 94 Horn and Lamps Parking lamps flash on each press horn chirps on the second press of the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter None No horn or lamp feedback will occur when the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter is pressed Headlamp Delay None Headlamps do not stay on after the ignition is turned to OFF 10 20 30 60 120 180 Seconds Amount of time headlamps stay on after the ignition is turned to OFF when it is dark switch must be in auto headlamp position Perimeter Lamps Enabled Parking lamps headlamps and puddle lamps turn on for 40 seconds with the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter This feature only operates when it is dark Disabled Feature disabled no perimeter lamps will come on Seat and Mirror Recall Remote When the remote keyless entry transmitters are programmed for each driver driver 1 or 2 pressing the UNLOCK button on the transmitters will move the seat and mirrors to the stored memory position for the driver associated with that particular transmitter driver 1 or 2 For more information on seat and mirror recall functions see Memory Seat and Memory Mirrors in the Index Key In Inserting the key into the ignition will cause the seat a
127. e back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window 1 49 Q How do child restraints work A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner For many years add on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle To help reduce the chance of injury the child also has to be secured within the restraint The vehicle s belt system secures the add on child restraint in the vehicle and the add on child restraint s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoul
128. e disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing 1 800 833 CMCC 2622 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to Cadillac the
129. e fluid from a sealed container only Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid NOTICE Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are wom and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could res
130. e located in the rear side windows Be sure that the inside surfaces of the rear side windows are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surfaces are damaged they could interfere with radio reception NOTICE Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear side windows with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may affect your radio s ability to pick up stations clearly The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone to your vehicle and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass it should be mounted on the drivers side Be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM FM antennas or place the cellular telephone antenna over the grid lines n 1 Section4 Your Driving and the Road ty F ne Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving 4 2 Defensive Driving 4 31 Driving at Night 4 3 Drunken Driving 4 32 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 6 Control of a Vehicle 4 36 City Driving 4 6 4 37 4 9 4 38 Braking Freeway Driving Traction Control System TCS z Before Leaving on a Long Trip 2 Wheel Drive 4 39 Highway Hypnosis 4 11 Stabilitrak System All Wheel Drive 4 39 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 12 Steering 4 41 Winter Driving 4 15 Off Road Re
131. e or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady
132. e the cruise control switch to OFF Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased Exterior Lamps DOWIE OVERRIDE Your parking lamp and headlamp knob is located on the driver s side of your instrument panel Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to manually turn on the following Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn off your lamps and put the system into automatic headlamp mode You can change your headlamps from high to low beam by pulling on the turn signal high beam lever A circuit breaker protects your headlamps If your headlamps have an electrical overload your headlamps will flicker on and off Have your vehicle s headlamp wiring checked right away if this happens 2 37 Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim Your vehicle is equipped with a headlamp off delay which will keep the headlamps on for a short time after the ignition is turned to OFF For more informati
133. e the seat exit position for driver 1 and driver 2 See Memory Seat Exit later in this section for more information The memory function does not store the lumbar or the side wing positions To store your memory seat and mirror positions do the following 1 Adjust the driver s seat and both outside mirrors to your desired position 2 Press and hold the 1 or 2 driver 1 or 2 button of the memory control for three seconds When you hear a chime ring two times the memory positions are stored To do the same thing for a second driver follow the preceding steps but press the other number of the memory control The memory recall feature only works when the transmission is in PARK P To recall memory seat and mirror positions make sure your vehicle is in PARK P then press the 1 or 2 button of the memory control to recall the seat setting You will hear a chime ring one time to let you know the setting has been selected The memory seat and mirror positions can also be programmed to work with the keyless entry system See Secondary Information Center in the Index for more information Memory Seat Exit For this function to work it must be enabled in the secondary information center See Secondary Information Center in the Index for more information By moving the seats to a stored exit position the memory seat exit feature can make it easier to leave the vehicle To store the seat exit position for
134. eady moving use NEUTRAL N only Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty 2 21 DRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than about 35 mph 56 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 56 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power DRIVE D can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE D 2 22 SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off a
135. ed after the ignition is turned to OFF If you still want to use the heated seat feature after you restart your vehicle you will need to press the heated seat button again 1 16 Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System SRS or air bag system Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index In most states and Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They wor
136. ed at the front of your vehicle You may need to use them if you re stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving The recovery hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back NOTICE Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty 5 37 1 Section6 Service and Appearance Care ti le Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care Service Fuel Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood Engine Oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter Passenger Compartment Air Filter Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Axle All Wheel Drive Engine Coolant Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid DDDADDDADDRDDDRDDD WWNHNNNFRF RF ADA NWLh Zoae ROODE 6 33 6 36 6 37 6 48 6 49 6 58 6 58 6 61 6 65 6 66 6 67 6 75 6 76 6 77 Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleanin
137. eed if you have to until your engine has run for a while 2 18 If your engine still won t start or starts but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the vehicle in the engine compartment near the power steering fluid reservoir 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Plugging the cord
138. eed selected the fan speed may be higher than normal ra Outside air Press this button located under the fan knob to use outside air Using outside air will limit stale air odors and help to prevent excessively humid interior air from wet boots or clothing or maximum passenger loads from being redirected onto windows Pressing the outside air button will cancel the recirculation button and AUTO mode of the airflow Pressing outside air will return the system to auto mode AD Recirculation Press this button to limit the amount of outside air entering the vehicle to a very small amount This will be helpful to limit odors entering the vehicle and will assist in reaching comfort in very hot temperature conditions Pressing recirculation will cause the system to recirculate interior air continuously and may cause the vehicle windows to fog if the passenger compartment floor is excessively wet Pressing the recirculation button will cancel outside air operation To return to normal system operation and to prevent stale passenger compartment air be sure to return to the outside air position Recirculation will not be available in floor blend or defrost modes This helps reduce window fogging If the recirculation button is pressed in theses modes the LED indicator for recirculation will flash three times indicating that forced outside air is activated and recirculation is not available If the air conditioning system is act
139. ehicle carbon monoxide CO could come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness or death See Engine Exhaust in the Index To maximize your safety when towing a trailer Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip Keep the rear most windows closed If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening drive with your front main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed This will bring fresh outside air into your vehicle Do not use recirculation because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index 4 56 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same ti
140. ehicle to attempt to free it See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index To exit the LIMITED mode press the Stabilitrak button again The STABILITY SYSTEM LIMITED message will be displayed whenever the transmission is in FIRST 1 Traction control will not operate in this gear This is normal STABILITY SYSTEM DISABLED Message The STABILITY SYSTEM DISABLED message indicates that the stability enhancement system has been temporarily disabled STABILITY SYSTEM DISABLED There are three conditions that can cause this message to appear One condition is overheating which could occur if the stability enhancement system activates continuously for an extended period of time The STABILITY SYSTEM DISABLED message will also be displayed if the brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light in the Index Finally the message could be displayed if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions The STABILITY SYSTEM DISABLED message will turn off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present Secondary Information Center SIC This section explains the features of your SIC The SIC provides instant information about fuel mileage and vehicle history in addition to allowing you to personalize certain features of your vehicle If you would like to skip to the section on personalizing your vehicle see the sec
141. eir arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it CAUTION Continued 1 45 Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide 1 46 Q A What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition th
142. ejected the cut tape detection feature is active again You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced 3 25 Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of Your Compact Disc Changer The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism 3 26 Diversity Antenna System Your AM FM antennas ar
143. em up and down It also tells you about reclining front seatbacks and head restraints Power Seats Horizontal Control Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole control toward the front or rear of the vehicle Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by raising or lowering the rear edge of the control Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers the entire seat cushion Reclining Front Seatbacks Your vehicle s front seatbacks have a recline feature Vertical Control You can use the vertical control to adjust the angle of the seatback Move the reclining front seatback forward or rearward by moving the control toward the front or toward the rear of the vehicle Move the seatback forward by moving the control toward the front of the vehicle See Reclining Seatbacks in the Index for further information Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when t
144. er Ashtray W Clock X Y Z Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Button StabiliTrak Button AWD Traction Control Button 2WD OnStar Buttons 2 67 Instrument Panel Cluster 9 ae 60 Xog ow SOON 9 Wy B amp BRAKE CRUISE AY iy MESSAGE CENTER ow Vili UV Up PRN DEAM 0 80 RPM X 1000 km 88 8 2 TRIP sh United States shown Canada similar Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel you have and many other things you ll need to know to drive safely and economically 2 68 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero Press the reset button to toggle between the trip odometer and the regular odometer Holding the reset button for two seconds while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it To display the odometer reading with the ignition off press the reset button Engine Hour Meter Display The odometer can also display the number of hours the engine has run To display the hour meter turn the ignition off press and ho
145. er s side of the vehicle The endcap should lock in the compressed position 3 Lift the shade up on the passenger s side swing the shade rearward and take it out of the vehicle To put the shade in the vehicle do the following 1 Make sure the shade slot in the holder faces rearward with the round surface facing down 2 Then hold the shade at an angle and place the shade holder tab into the slot in the driver s side trim panel 3 Move the other end of the shade forward and hold it next to the passenger s side trim panel slot 4 Push the button on top of the passenger s side endcap This will allow the shade to extend into the trim slot Cargo Tie Downs There are cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it from moving inside the vehicle When not using the tie downs flip them down out of the way Convenience Net The convenience net in the rear of your vehicle helps to keep small loads like grocery bags in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts The net is not designed for larger heavier items To install the net attach the hooks to the raised cargo tie downs Then attach the cord loops to the button retainers in the side trim You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you re not using it Luggage Carrier You can load things on top of your vehicle with this feature The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached
146. ere are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that s unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints 1 47 Restraint Systems for Children An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 1 48 A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against th
147. erhead console to express open the glass panel and sunshade To close the glass panel press and hold the front of the button The glass will not be fully seated unless the button is held until the glass stops moving With the sunroof closed press the forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the vent position 2 61 The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you can pull forward to block sun rays If a hand arm or other object is blocking the sunroof glass panel as it is closing the glass panel will stop at the obstruction After the obstruction is removed the glass panel can be closed or opened Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods of time as debris may collect in the tracks If the battery has been recharged disconnected or is not working you may need to reprogram the sunroof To do this start the vehicle and press the forward side of the sunroof switch until the glass panel moves to a fully closed position Release and press again to move to the vent position which occurs when the sunroof is fully tilted rearward This will reset the memory and enable the sunroof to function properly 2 62 HomeLink Transmitter This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operat
148. erious accident 6 After mounting the spare put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Tighten each wheel nut by hand Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held against the hub Front Position 5 29 7 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle Lower the jack completely Counterclockwise Down Rear Position 8 Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise 5 30 Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 140 lb ft 190 N m Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools NOTICE Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place When you reinstall the full size wheel and tire you must also reinsta
149. ers This additional control results in better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer See Tow Haul Mode in the Index for more information Locking Rear Axle Your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle 2 30 Horn To sound the horn press the center pad on the steering wheel Tilt Wheel The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever located on the lower left of the column Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change just raise or lower t
150. ervice publications and how to report any safety defects 8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 8 Courtesy Transportation 8 3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8 8 Transportation Options TTY Users 8 10 Warranty Information 8 4 Customer Assistance Offices 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United 8 5 GM Mobility Program for Persons States Government with Disabilities 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to the 8 5 Roadside Service Canadian Government 8 7 Roadside Service for the Hearing or 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to Speech Impaired General Motors Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken 8 2 STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Cadil
151. es clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different f
152. estraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 63 Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide 1 64 Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A If possible an older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so sm
153. etermine when to check the indicator The service window A with the percentage scale shows the amount of engine air cleaner filter life used When both service window A and service window B turn orange replace the engine air cleaner filter After changing the engine air cleaner filter press the button on top of the air filter restriction indicator to reset it Your engine air cleaner filter is located in the air filter housing near the front corner of the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location 6 17 Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Don t drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off 1 To remove the engine air cleaner filter loosen the screws on the cover NOTICE 2 Lift the cover upward and remove the engine air cleaner filter out of the air cleaner housing Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it 3 Clean filter sealing surface and the housing Always have the air cleaner filter in place when 4
154. f you ever have questions Underinflated tires pose the same danger as about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see overloaded tires The resulting accident your Cadillac Warranty booklet for details could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index CAUTION Continued 6 49 Inflation Tire Pressure eee j NEEN NOTICE Continued The Certification Tire label which is located on the rear edge of the driver s door shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km e Unusual wear NOTICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage fr
155. following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so Stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off 2 79 Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into
156. fying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns Cadillac recognizes these concerns and urges every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife this includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system 4 19 Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It s a good idea to practice in an area that s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness
157. g the Inside of Your Vehicle Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Vehicle Identification Number VIN Electrical System Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco n T NINE adele Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work ona vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle
158. g the Third Row Seat 1 Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions listed previously 2 Unlatch the seat from ish the floor by pulling up on the lever labeled 2 located on the rear of the seat 3 Lift the rear of the seat up off of the floor and push it forward until it locks into place You will not be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the seatback is folded down The seat will now remain locked in the upright position 1 12 1 Pull the lever labeled 3 toward you 2 While still holding lever 3 toward you grasp the top of the seat and pull it toward you slightly Let go of lever 3 and pull the seat completely down Push down on the seat firmly Try pulling it up to be sure it is locked into place 5 Pull up on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the seatback or the assist strap located on the outboard side of the seat until the seatback locks into the upright position Removing the Third Row Seats Your vehicle s third row seats can be taken out for more cargo space To remove a rear split bench seat do the following 1 Open the liftgate 2 Pull up on the release lever labeled 1 located on the rear of the seatback and push the seatback forward 1 13 3 To unlatch the rear of the seat from the floor pull up on the release lever labeled 2 at the rear of the seat and lift the rear of the seat up off of the floor 4 Squeeze the relea
159. gh the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Cleaning Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Cleaning Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently so that the speaker won t be damaged Clean spots with just water and mild soap 6 59 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 6 60 Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index NOTICE Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades If the windshield is n
160. gnal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn t Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving in the Index 4 21 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can t do There are some hills that simply can t be driven no matter how well built the vehicle Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you can t control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness don t drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it s one of those hills that s just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant 4 22 incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On
161. h if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Use chrome polish only on chrome plated whee
162. h the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P While pulling a trailer With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 3 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level 6 21 Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps 6 22 The red transmission dipstick handle with the graphic or the text is located at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger s side See Engine Compartment
163. have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn t being used at the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section 1 67 im I A ne y Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem Windows Keys Door Locks Keyless Entry System 2 Liftgate Liftglass 3 Theft 4 Content Theft Deterrent 5 Passlock 6 6 7 New Vehicle Break In Ignition Positions Starting Your Engine 2 19 Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped 2 20 Automatic Transmission Operation 2 24 Parking Brake 2 25 Shifting Into PARK P 2 27 Shifting Out of PARK P 2 28 Parking Over Things That Burn 2 28 Engine Exhaust mememe OOO Bf LD 2 29 2 30 2 31 2 37 2 41 2 43 2 49 2 57 2 58 2 61 2 62 2 66 2 68 2 69 2 83 2 91 2 97 Running Your Engine While You re Parked Locking Rear Axle Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Exterior Lamps Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Analog Clock OnStar System If Equipped Sunroof If Equipped HomeLink Transmitter The Instrume
164. he button on the buckle 1 40 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the second and third row seats To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts Here s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt 1 For the second row remove the guide from its storage clip on the trim panel near the side of the seatback For the third row remove the guide from its storage clip on the side of the seatback 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat of the belt into the slots of the guide The guide must be on top of the belt 1 41 1 42 Second Row Seat Third Row Seat 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions earlier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides Center Passenger Positio
165. he center of the grill Lift the hood Before closing the hood be sure all filler caps are on properly Pull down the hood and close it firmly When you open the hood on the 6000 H O engine 5300 similar you will see 2 25 hee a oO oS Engine Air Cleaner Filter Coolant Surge Tank Air Filter Restriction Indicator Engine Oil Fill Engine Oil Dipstick Automatic Transmission Dipstick Fan Remote Negative Terminal GND Remote Positive Terminal Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Out of View Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir Underhood Fuse Block Battery Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir Engine Oil If the CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL appears on the message center it means you need to check your engine oil level right away CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL For more information see CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL in the Index You should check your engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder 6 11 Checking Engine Oil It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick has a yellow loop handle and is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pa
166. he highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park ina garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 29 Autoride The Autoride feature provides superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed wheel to body position lift dive and steering position of the vehicle The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride Autoride also interacts with the tow haul mode that when engaged will provide additional control of the shock absorb
167. he lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you The lever on the left side of the steering column complete your lane change The lever will return by includes the following itself when you release it Turn and Lane Change Signals If you move the lever all the way up or down and the e Headlamp High Low Beam Changer arrow flashes at twice the normal rate a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers may not see Flash to Pass Feature your turn signal Windshield Wipers If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an e Windshield Washer accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you j signal a turn check for burned out bulbs and a blown Cruise Control fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index 2 31 Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal To turn off the chime move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam or high to low beam pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this light on the instrument panel cluster also will be on Flash To Pass Feature This feature allows you to use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are off To use it pull the turn signal le
168. he tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 6 52 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Certification Tire label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a
169. he vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle well back in the seat and wear your safety is moving belt properly Power Lumbar Control Your vehicle s power lumber controls are located near the power seat controls You can increase or decrease lumbar support in an area of the lower seatback with the lumber controls To increase support press and hold the front of the control To decrease support press and hold the rear of the control Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower seatback for more lateral support To increase support press and hold the top of the control To decrease support press and hold the bottom of the control Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support Memory Seat and Memory Mirrors The memory function controls are located on the driver s door trim panel For this function to work it must be enabled configured in the secondary information center See Secondary Information Center in the Index for more information These controls are used to program and recall the memory settings for the driver s seat and both the driver s and the passenger s outside mirrors The seat and mirror positions can be personalized for both driver 1 and driver 2 In addition you can also stor
170. hen the engine is running you may have a problem with your charging system The battery display will also stay on while the key is in RUN until the engine is started If the message stays on after starting the engine it could indicate a problem with the generator drive belt or some other charging system problem Have it checked right away Driving with this message displayed could drain your battery If you must drive a short distance with this message displayed it helps to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and the air conditioner 2 83 TRANS FLUID HOT Message Your vehicle has a transmission temperature warning display contained in the message center If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high the message center will display this message When the transmission enters the protection mode you may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns When the transmission fluid temperature returns to normal the display will turn off and the transmission shifting patterns will return to normal NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with the transmission TRANS FLUID HOT message displayed you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered under your warranty 2 84 The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures Towing a trailer Hot outside air temperatures Hauling a large or heavy load Low transmis
171. hich shows the air bag symbol Anyone who is up against or very close to any The system checks the air bag electrical system for air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index the best protection for adults but not for young for more information CAUTION Continued 1 31 How the Air Bag Systems Work Where are the air bags The right front passenger s frontal air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side The driver s side impact air bag is in the side of the The driver s frontal air bag is in the middle of the driver s seatback closest to the door steering wheel 1 32 If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering Don t let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact air bag The right front passenger s side impact air bag is in the side of the passenger s seatback closest to the door 1 33 When should an air bag inflate The driver s and right front passenger s fro
172. hild Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 57 5 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 58 Securing a Chil
173. hylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine 5 15 a OPEV Your vehicle may be G RO ipped with one of A m equipped with one o SURGE RESERVOIR the two caps shown TANK D EXPANSION 15 PSI 105 kPa d Oty DEX COOL Ko IS OuvA 1 You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise left about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 5 16 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and 3 Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper remove it mixture to the FILL COLD mark 5 17 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off 5 Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure start the engine and let it run until you can feel the cap is hand tight upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches FILL COLD mark 5 18 Engine Fan Noise Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditi
174. icle is equipped with an automatic transmission You or others could be injured To be sure your and features an electronic shift position indicator within vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly the instrument panel cluster This display is powered any level ground always set your parking brake and time the shift lever is capable of being moved out of aa move the shift lever to PARK P PARK P This means that if your key is in OFF rather wae than LOCK there will be a small current drain on your See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index battery which could discharge your battery over a period If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer of time If you have to leave your key in the ignition in in the Index OFF for an extended period it is recommended that you remove the IGN 0 fuse from the instrument panel fuse block See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index There are several different positions for your shift lever 2 20 REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index NEUTRAL N In this position your engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re alr
175. id If you do not have this system or if the system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid 4 17 Operating Your All Wheel Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads Many of the same design features that help make your vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather conditions features like the locking rea
176. id is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work at all So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index 6 33 Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Just look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it isn t have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark 6 34 What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Use new brak
177. ide or low speed frontal crashes And for some unrestrained occupants frontal air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past The side impact air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle They aren t designed to inflate in frontal in rollover or in rear crashes Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate belt system nor its air bag system is designed with great force faster than the blink of an eye for them Young children and infants need the If you re too close to an inflating air bag as you protection that a child restraint system can would be if you were leaning forward it could provide Always secure children properly in your seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in vehicle To read how see the part of this manual position for air bag inflation before and during a called Children crash Always wear your safety belt even with frontal air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Front occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel w
178. ine When replacing the pressure cap make sure it is hand tight 6 30 When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment toward the front of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location How to Check Power Steering Fluid Turn the key off let the engine compartment cool down wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient pr
179. ing in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information 2 16 Ignition Positions You can use your key to turn the ignition switch to five different positions A ACCESSORY This position lets you use things like the radio power windows and the windshield wipers when the engine is off Push in the key and turn it toward you B LOCK This position locks your ignition and transmission It s a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if So is it all the way in Turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle needs service C OFF This lets you turn off the engine Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off for example if your vehicle is being pushed D RUN This is the position for driving E START This position starts your engine Retained Accessory Power RAP The Retained Accessory Power RAP feature will allow certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF or a door is opened Your radio power windows sunroof if equipped and OnStar Syste
180. ing system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index Here s how anti lock works Let s say the road is wet You re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even
181. ion This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Programming the HomeLink Transmitter Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door you are programming It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Decide which one of the three channels one of the three HomeLink buttons you want to program 2 Press and hold the desired button on HomeLink through Step 3 3 When the HomeLink indicator light begins to blink slowly this may take up to 30 seconds hold the hand held transmitter about to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm from HomeLink and then press and hold the transmit button on the hand held transmitter Continue to hold both but
182. ion See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM Oil Life System or every 12 months whichever occurs first Reset the system The system will show you when to change the oil usually between 3 000 miles 5 000 km and 10 000 miles 16 000 km since your last oil change Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 3 000 miles 5 000 km Never drive your vehicle more than 10 000 miles 16 000 km or 12 months without an oil and filter change 7 6 The system won t detect dust in the oil So if you drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or sooner if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears Remember to reset the Oil Life System when the oil and filter have been changed See Oil Life System in the Index for information on resetting An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil and filter change Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage transmission shift linkage transfer case shift linkage parking brake cable guides and brake front axle Ball joints should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10 F 12 C or higher or they could be damaged Scheduled Maintenance ENGINE OIL CHAN
183. irror The driver s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of any headlamps behind you This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the electrochromic mirror See Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature earlier in this section 2 47 Power Folding Mirrors Your vehicle is equipped with power folding mirrors This feature can be helpful when taking your vehicle through a car wash or through narrow spaces To fold the mirrors in press the button located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel Return the mirrors to their normal position by pressing the button again 2 48 Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger s side mirror is convex A convex muirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Storage Compartments Glove Box To open your glove box lift up the latch and pull the door open Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle has a console compartment between the bucket seats To open it insert the console key into the lock and unlock the center console Press the button on the side and swing the console lid open The console has a place to store compac
184. is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision LEFT APPROX QUARTER TURN EA eee N So here are some tips for passing e Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn center line usually indicates it s all right to pass until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down line on your side of the lane or a double solid line the roadway even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic 4 15 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while
185. is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near frontal impacts For side impact air bags inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving in the Index for more tips on off road driving What makes an air bag inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash For both frontal and side impact air bags the sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel instrument panel and the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But the frontal air bags would not help you in many types of coll
186. ise control on slippery roads Setting Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control switch on when you re not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don t want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Move the cruise control switch to ON 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal a CRUISE United States Canada The CRUISE light on the instrument panel cluster will illuminate when the cruise control is engaged Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course disengages the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch from ON to R A briefly You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you continue to hold the switch at R A the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at R A 2 35 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the SET button at the end of the lever then release the button and the acceler
187. isions including rollovers rear impacts and side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward the air bag Side impact air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including frontal or near frontal collisions rollovers and rear impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s frontal air bags and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s side impact air bags What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag the side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and right front passenger s side impact air bags will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle
188. isn t at or above the FILL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is cool before you do it See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 14 Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant NOTICE In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts So use the recommended coolant You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains et
189. ivated and system demand is high in situations such as city traffic idling or very hot weather the system will automatically switch from outside air to recirculation The LED indicator will not change After the demand on the system is not so great the system will return to outside air Re A C Press this button to turn the air conditioning on and off The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle when the A C light is on When in AUTO the A C is automatically engaged when necessary Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when the outside temperature drops below a level which air conditioning is ineffective Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater With Sunroof Your vehicle has the rear air conditioning and rear heater system combination Controls are provided to regulate temperature location and speed of the airflow Front Control To adjust the airflow speed turn the fan control knob located on the left side to the desired setting To regulate the airflow direction adjust the right knob on the control panel Turn the knob clockwise for floor vent airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent airflow Generally the upper vents are used for air conditioning and the floor vents for heating The knob can be set to any blend setting To adjust the air temperature turn the temperature knob on the center of the control panel For warmer air turn the knob clockwise toward red For cooler
190. ivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and aren t even aware of it 4 32 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your Driving too fast through large water puddles or even windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain going through some car washes can cause problems too can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles pavement markings the edge of the road and even But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them people walking It s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose
191. k You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot 1 17 When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something doesn t stop In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel 1 20 or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts make such good sense Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q A 7 Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being consciou
192. ked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of PARK P Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to OFF Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 Shift the
193. l Controls Your Driving and the Road Defensive Driving Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions Drunken Driving Off Road Driving Control of a Vehicle Loading Your Vehicle Braking Towing a Trailer Steering Problems on the Road Hazard Warning Flashers Engine Overheating J ump Starting Changing a Flat Tire Towing Your Vehicle IfYou re Stuck iii Table of Contents cont d Service and Appearance Care Fuel Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Checking Fluids and Lubricants Tires and Wheels GM Oil Life System Appearance Care Engine Air Cleaner Filter Electrical System Fuses and Circuit Breakers Passenger Compartment Air Filter Capacities and Specifications Brakes Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Bulb Replacement Maintenance Schedule Scheduled Maintenance Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Owner Checks and Services Maintenance Records Periodic Maintenance Inspections Table of Contents cont d Customer Assistance Information Customer Satisfaction Procedures Warranty Information See Warranty M anual Customer Assistance Offices Reporting Safety Defects on page 8 10 Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation Service Publications Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide GENERAL MOTORS GM and the GM Emblem CADILLAC the CADILLAC Crest amp Wreath and the name ESCALADE are registered t
194. l Delivery Cadillac Owner Privileges e Flat Tire Change Covers change only Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner f Pte Privileges at no charge throughout your 2002 Cadillac Trip Interruption If your trip is interrupted due Warranty Period 48 months 50 000 miles 80 000 km to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 48 months 50 000 miles 80 000 km warranty period Items covered are hotel meals and rental car Roadside Service Availability Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada an advisor is available to assist you over the phone A dealer technician if available can travel to your location within a 30 mile 50 km radius of a participating Cadillac dealership If beyond this radius we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership Reaching Roadside Service Dial the toll free Roadside Service number 1 800 882 1112 An experienced Roadside Service Advisor will assist you and request the following information A description of the problem Name home address home telephone number Location of your Cadillac and number you are calling from The model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN mileage and date of delivery Roadside Service for the Hearing or Speech Impaired Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired Cadillac has installed special telecommunica
195. l will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil in the Index If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down CAUTION Continued 5 10 Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode in the Index NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode in the Index If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic e Tow atrailer See Driving on Grades in the Index If you get the overheat warning with no sign
196. lac Customer Assistance Center 24 hours a day by calling 1 800 458 8006 In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Cadillac please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotiv
197. lay a tape if you have a tape loaded in the cassette tape player and the radio is turned on When a tape is playing a lighted arrow will appear on the display and show the direction of play If the radio is turned off the tape will remain in the player and resume playing at the point where it stopped EJECT Press this button to remove the tape The radio will now play Eject can be used with either the ignition or radio off To load a cassette tape with the ignition or radio off press EJECT before loading the cassette CHANGER Press this button to play a CD if you have a CD loaded in the CD changer When a CD is playing the disc number and track number will be displayed Press this button again and elapsed time will appear on the display See Compact Disc Changer later in this section CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature perform the following steps 1 Turn the
198. ld riding in a booster seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat Here s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat CAUTION Continued You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it 1 51 Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap or top tether It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision For it to work a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle If the child restraint does not have a top strap one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available 1 52 In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and tha
199. ld the reset button for at least four seconds The hour meter will be displayed for up to 30 seconds or until the ignition is turned on Tachometer Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle 2 69 When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Your vehicle also has a message center that works along with
200. letter should be addressed to Cadillac s Customer Assistance Center United States Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 1 800 458 8006 1 800 833 2622 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area dri
201. ll come on when you start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on and is ready to make or receive calls If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or outgoing call is in progress Press the Call ANSWER END button if you notice the light blinking and you are not on a call The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system malfunction If this occurs press the OnStar button to attempt to contact an advisor If the connection is made the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make sure that the system is functioning properly If you cannot contact the advisor take your vehicle to your dealership as soon as possible for assistance Safety and Security Services Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment If an air bag deploys a priority emergency signal is sent automatically to the center An advisor will locate your vehicle s position try to contact you and assist you in the situation If the center is unable to contact you an emergency service provider will be contacted Stolen Vehicle Tracking Call the center at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 to report your vehicle stolen The system can then locate and track your vehicle and the advisor will be able to notify the proper authorities Roadside Assistance with Location For vehicle breakdowns press the OnStar button An advisor will contact the appropriate help Remote Diagnostics If an instrument panel light comes on the center can perfo
202. ll the center cap Place the cap on the wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel The cap can only go on one way Be sure to line up the tab on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel Store the flat tire where the spare tire was stored 5 31 Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier To store the tire do the following 1 Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed upward 2 Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel opening Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel 3 Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together I Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft PUSH amp PULL 4 Raise the tire part way upward Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening 5 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the Woner vehicle Continue turning the wheel wrench until the tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened 6 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable C Replace the jack tools and spare tire lock 5 32 A Hoist Assembly B Wheel Wrench C Jack Handle Extensions D Hoist Shaft E Valve Stem Pointed Up F Flat or Spare
203. llation procedure Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission through the opening created by removing the propeller shaft if proper protection is not provided Also check the transmission fluid level before driving the truck 4 46 When the vehicle is properly attached to the tow vehicle and is ready to be towed turn the ignition to OFF The OFF position unlocks the steering column and will allow the proper movement of the front wheels and tires during towing To prevent the battery from draining remove the IGN 0 fuse from the instrument panel fuse block See Fuses in the Index for more information about removing the IGN 0 fuse NOTICE Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Don t tow an all wheel drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground Dolly Towing Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Only Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed To properly tow these vehicles they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground In rare cases when it s unavoidable that a two wheel drive vehicle is to be towed with the rear wheels on the ground the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft remove
204. ls but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty 6 63 Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accelerated corrosion rus
205. lt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS This part explains the frontal and side impact Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS or air bag systems Your vehicle has four air bags a frontal air bag for the driver another frontal air bag for the right front passenger a side impact air bag for the driver and another side impact air bag for the right front passenger Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations 1 29 Here are the most important things to know about the air bag systems You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them CAUTION Continued 1 30 Frontal air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear s
206. lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Body Door Hinge Pins Liftgate Hinge and Linkage Folding Seat and Fuel Door Hinge Outer Liftgate Handle Pivot Points Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No 12345579 or equivalent Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No 12371287 or equivalent Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on the following record pages Also you should retain all maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED n 1 Section8 Customer Assistance Information ty F ne Here you will find out how to contact Cadillac if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain s
207. m if equipped will also work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a safety feature To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm 2 17 NOTICE Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 Ifit doesn t start within 10 seconds push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while you hold the ignition key in START When the engine starts let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal Wait about 15 seconds between each try When starting your engine in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C do this 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START and hold it there When the engine starts let go of the key Use the accelerator pedal to maintain engine sp
208. m is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Gage Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced United States Canada NOTICE The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure Check your oil as soon as possible See Check Eng Oil Pressure and Engine Oil in the Index 2 81 Cruise Light i con United States Canada The CRUISE light comes on whenever you set your cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index Tow
209. m under the vehicle The wheel wrench has a hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable H towards you to assist in reaching the spare tire When the tire has been lowered tilt the retainer G at the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening Put the spare tire near the flat tire The tools you ll be using include the bottle jack A the wheel blocks B the jack handle C the jack handle extensions D and the wheel wrench E If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle you ll need to use both jack handle extensions 5 23 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions as needed Attach the jack handle to the jack 5 24 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift head to the lifting point To remove the center cap place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry out 1 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts Don t remove the wheel nuts yet AO FA Rear Position Front Position 2 Position the jack under the vehicle If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle use the jacking pad provided on the rear axle 5 26 Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly i
210. may experience differences in how the transmission shifts until the engine is warm This feature automatically reduces the time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating temperature and shortens the time it takes the heater to reach full output If you use the engine coolant heater before starting your engine in cold weather 20 F 8 C or lower the heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating temperature For more information see Engine Coolant Heater in the Index 3 7 Defogging and Defrosting On cool humid days use defog to keep the windshield and side windows clear Use defrost to remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely humid or cold conditions Use defrost with the temperature knob toward the red area and the fan control turned all the way to the right Rear Window Defogger Do not remove the rear window with the rear defogger on You may see a discharge spark coming from the latch area if you remove the window with the defroster on The lines running across the rear window are the rear window defogger lines The lines warm the glass To turn on the rear window defogger press this button located below the mode knob The rear window defogger will only work if the ignition is in RUN For best results clear the window of as much snow or ice as
211. me During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance 4 57 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also
212. message still flashes after being reset try the reset procedure one more time If it does not reset after this see your dealer for service 6 16 What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a real threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter before disposal Don t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help Engine Air Cleaner Filter The air cleaner assembly has an air filter restriction indicator that lets you know when the engine air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be serviced The air filter restriction indicator is located on the air cleaner cover See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location See Owner Checks and Services in the Index to d
213. n Lap Belt When you sit in the center seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt 1 43 To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 44 Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by the appropriate restraint Young children should not use the vehicle s safety belts unless there is no other choice For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 lb 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint People should never hold a baby in th
214. n If you don t the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 6 12 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD mark then you ll need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use For crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index NOTICE Don t add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged The engine oil fill cap is located on the valve cover on the passenger s side of the vehicle Your vehicle may have a cap with text and a graphic or just a graphic as shown above See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for further location information Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through 6 13 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol If you change your own oil be sure you
215. n In the automatic mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in OFF Puddle Lamps Your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps to help you see the area near the base of the front doors when it is dark out The puddle lamps will illuminate when a door is opened or when you press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter You can program the puddle lamps not to come on if you choose See Secondary Information Center in the Index for more information Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met The ignition is on the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp mode the automatic transmission is not in PARK P the light sensor determines it is daytime and the parking brake is released 2 39 When the DRL are on only your DRL lamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on The instrument panel won t be lit up either When it begins to get dark the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the last chosen headlamp setting that was used When you turn the headlamp k
216. n See refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements Engine Type VIN Code Spark Plug Gap VORTEC 5300 V8 T 0 060 inches 1 52 mm VORTEC 6000 H O V8 N 0 060 inches 1 52 mm Wheels and Tires Crankcase Capacity Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 N m After refill the level must be rechecked Add enough Tire Pressure See the Certification Tire i a properoperaimg label on the rear edge of the ge 8 driver s door Engine VIN Quantity VORTEC 5300 V8 T 6 0 quarts 5 7 L Cooling System Capacity VORTEC 6000 H O V8 N 6 0 quarts 5 7 L After refill the level must be rechecked See Cooling System in the Index Fuel Tank Capacity Engine Quantity 26 0 U S gallons 98 4 L VORTEC 5300 V8 18 6 quarts 17 6 L VORTEC 6000 H O V8 19 0 quarts 18 0 L 6 76 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing and are subject to change If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was built or if you have any questions please contact your GM dealer VIN Code T N Oil Filter PF59 PF59 Engine Air Cleaner Filter A1518C A1518C Passenger Compartment Air Filter Kit 52485513 52485513 PCV Valve CV948C CV948C Spark Plugstf PTZ14R15 PTJ16R15 PZTRSA154 4 41 974 PZTRSA15444 41 974 Fuel Filter GF626 GF626 Wiper Blades Fro
217. n the system may require service have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if the system is turned off If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving there may be a problem with your Traction Control System and your vehicle may need service When this light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The TRAC OFF light may come on for the following reasons e If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS on off button located to the right of the steering wheel the light will come on and stay on To turn the system back on press the button again the light should go off Ifyou move the shift lever to FIRST 1 the light will come on and stay on to indicate that the Traction Control System is off This is normal operation To turn the system back on move the shift lever back to a position other than FIRST 1 the light should go off See Traction Control System in the Index The light will come on and stay on if the TCS automatic engagement feature has been turned off To turn the system on press the TCS off on button the light should go off To turn the automatic engagement feature back on see Traction Control System in the Index Ifthe Traction Control System is affected by an anti lock brake system Traction Control System or engine related problem the system will turn off and the light will come on Have your vehicle serviced Ifthe vehicle is d
218. n as possible Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on the brake system warning light will flash when you set the parking brake The light will flash if the parking brake doesn t release fully If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged a chime will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h 2 72 Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away QOC T BRAKE Canada United States This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service
219. n is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only Driving in Water Light rain causes no special off road driving problems But heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe don t try it you probably won t get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts 4 29 If the water isn t too deep then drive through it slowly At fast speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you ll never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it s only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires
220. n roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Pull the shift lever toward you 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 25 Move the lever up as far as it will go 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P 2 26 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you move the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully loc
221. nd conversions The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 53 If you re using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure yo
222. nd lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening Power Door Locks Press the raised side of the switch marked L on either front door to lock all of the doors at once Press the recessed side of the switch marked U to unlock all of the doors at once On the passenger side of the liftgate opening trim there is a power lock switch which can be used to lock or unlock all of the doors The power door locks will operate at any time without the ignition being on The power door locks can be programmed to automatically lock and unlock depending on the settings you have chosen in the Secondary Information Center SIC See Secondary Information Center SIC in the Index for more information Operating the power locks may interact with the theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent in the Index Lockout Prevention This feature protects you from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the
223. nd meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
224. nd mirrors to move to stored memory position for driver 1 or 2 Disabled Position recall will not work with the keyless entry transmitter or when key is placed in the ignition Driver must manually select memory button 1 or 2 to activate the memory seat recall when disable is selected Exit Position of Seat Enabled Removing the key will cause the seat to move to the stored driver or 2 exit position Disabled Seat will not move to exit position when key is removed from ignition Driver must manually press EXIT button to activate the seat exit position feature when disable is selected Mirror Reverse Tilt Passenger Mirror on the passenger s side of vehicle will tilt down to a stored memory position for driver 1 or 2 when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE R Driver Mirror on the driver s side of the vehicle will tilt down to a stored memory position for driver 1 or 2 when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE R All Both the driver s and passenger s side mirrors will tilt down to a stored memory position for driver 1 or 2 when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE R Disabled No mirrors will tilt when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE R Alarm Warning Horn Horn will sound when the alarm is active Lamps Headlamps and park lamps will cycle on and off when alarm is activated Horn and Lamps Horn and lamps will alternate when the alarm is activated None No alarm warning will come on 2 95 Language
225. nd on If you manually select SECOND 2 the transmission will drive in second gear You may use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces Once the vehicle is moving shift into DRIVE D FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slow enough NOTICE If your wheels can t turn don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transmission Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transmission Use your brakes or shift into PARK P to hold your vehicle in position on a hill On cold days approximately 32 F 0 C or colder your transmission is designed to shift differently until the engine reaches normal operating temperature This is intended to improve heater performance Tow Haul Mode Button Your vehicle is equipped with a tow haul mode The button is located on the end of the column shift lever You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load See Tow H
226. nd will be available for passengers to use when the seat is returned to the passenger position Also make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat 2 Make sure the seatback is in an upright position unreclined before folding it Pull up on the strap loop located at the rear of the seat cushion and pull the seat cushion up Then fold it forward 4 Pull the seatback forward and fold it down until it is flat If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with the cushion try moving the front seat forward and or bringing the front seatback more upright Returning the Seats to an Upright Position To return the seat to the upright position do the following 1 2 Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all the way Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat cushion to make sure the seat is securely in place Return the headrest to the upright position by pulling the top of the headrest upwards until you hear a click Check to see that the safety belt buckles on the driver s side seatback are accessible to the outboard and center occupants and are not under the seat cushions Rear Seat Second Row Armrest The second row seat has a center fold down armrest which contains a storage compartment To release the armrest locate the loop attached to the armrest and then pull it up and then down Within the storag
227. ne Overheating in the Index Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you start your engine shift into a gear and release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you
228. ne vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If you have the Traction Assist System remember It helps avoid only the acceleration sk
229. nflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem Voltmeter United States Canada When your engine is not running but the ignition is in RUN this gage shows your battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range 2 71 Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soo
230. ng the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 19 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in PARK P 3 Turn off the engine 4 Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end 5 20 SS i The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment is located under the rear seat behind the driver s seat and behind the left trim panel in the rear of the vehicle Turn Counter Clockwise F a Remove Pa S Rear Access Panel A Speaker D Retaining Hook B Bottle Jack E Wheel Blocks C Wing Nut F Cover Panel To release the bottle jack B from its holder turn the knob on the bottle jack counterclockwise
231. nish 12378188 15 oz 0 443 L Foaming Tire Cleans shines and protects in one easy step ii Shine Low Gloss No wiping necessary 12378401 16 oz 0 473 L Wash Wax Concentrate Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes aa Biodegradable and phosphate free 12378488 8 oz 0 237 L Spot Lifter Quickly and easily removes spots and stains from a P carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery See your General Motors Parts Department for these products See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 65 Vehicle Identification Number VIN ENGINE 20024 ASSEMBLY CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration 6 66 Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on the inside of the glovebox It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is your VIN the model designation paint information and a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle Elec
232. njured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 3 Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the rear axle is resting securely between the grooves that are on the jack head Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle Counterclockwise Down Rear Position Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit back underneath the rear of the vehicle Front Position 5 27 4 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire 5 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 5 28 Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a s
233. nnector from the old bulb Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb using care not to touch the bulb with your hands fingers or anything damp or oily Place the connector with the new bulb into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight Reinstall the rubber circular shaped bulb cap onto the headlamp assembly 6 40 14 Reconnect the electrical connector to the lower corner of the headlamp assembly 15 Place the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle being sure to align the lower locator tab with the pocket on the vehicle see arrow Push the headlamp assembly straight in and then down into position 16 Install the two pins and snap the ends into their locked position 17 Reinstall the radiator cover by reversing the removal procedure described previously Headlamp Aiming Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system equipped with horizontal aim indicators The aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment This is true even though your horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the 0 zero marks on their scales If your vehicle is damaged in an accident the headlamp aim may be affected Aim adjustment to the low beam may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers for horizontal aim or if oncoming drivers flash their high beams at you for vertical aim If you believe you
234. nning See Replacement Bulbs in the Index for the proper types of bulbs to use Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package 6 37 Headlamps 1 Open the hood of the vehicle 2 Pry up the eight fastener plugs on the radiator cover with a screwdriver and pull the fasteners out A Low Beam Headlamp 3 Lift off the radiator cover B Daytime Running Lamp C Sidemarker Lamp D High Beam Headlamp E Front Turn Signal Lamp 6 38 4 Remove the horizontal pin from the headlamp assembly by lifting the end of the pin upward until it unsnaps and then pulling it toward the center of the vehicle Remove the vertical pin from the headlamp assembly by turning the end of the pin away from you until it unsnaps and then pulling it upward Remove the headlamp assembly by lifting it up and then pulling it out and away from the front of the vehicle Disconnect the electrical connector from the lower corner of the headlamp assembly this will give you better access to the headlamp assembly 10 11 12 13 Remove the rubber circular shaped bulb cap of the affected bulb from the headlamp assembly Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and remove it with the old bulb from the headlamp assembly Unplug the electrical co
235. nob to off the headlamps will go off and your DRL lamps will illuminate provided it is not dark outside To idle your vehicle with the DRL off set the parking brake Shifting the transmission into PARK P will also allow you to idle the vehicle with the DRL off The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake or shift the transmission out of PARK P 2 40 This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the United States When necessary you may turn off the Automatic Headlamp System and the Daytime Running Lamps DRL feature by following these steps When the system is turned off the headlights will not automatically come on when it becomes dark outside 1 With the ignition in RUN 2 Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds After the fourth press of the button a chime will sound informing you the system is off 3 The system will revert back to the automatic mode when the DOME OVERRIDE button is again pressed four times within six seconds a chime will sound or when the ignition is turned off and on again As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Fog Lamps Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions Your parking lamps and or low beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work The fog lamp button is located on the left side of the instrument panel Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while
236. nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it When you park your vehicle and open the driver s door you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your ignition and transmission will be locked Also remember to lock the doors If the key is in the ignition with any door open and you try to lock your doors with the power door locks the driver s door will not stay locked This will help to keep you from locking your keys in the vehicle Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep your valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you Parking Lots Even if you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s still best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle Put your valuables in a storage area like your glove box Valuables can be locked in the center floor console Take the remote keyless entry system transmitter with you Lock all the doors except the driver s 2 13 Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft deterren
237. nt 15706394 15706394 Wiper Blade Type Front ITTA ITTA Wiper Blade Length Front 22 0 inches 56 0 cm 22 0 inches 56 0 cm ACDelco part number tF NGK part number GM part number FF Spark Plug Gap is 0 060 inches Denso part number 6 77 E n 1 Section7 Maintenance Schedule igs il This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction 7 21 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 4 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 23 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance 7 25 Part E Maintenance Record 7 17 Part B Owner Checks and Services IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details 7 2 Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and
238. nt Panel Your Information System Instrument Panel Cluster Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Message Center Secondary Information Center SIC Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA Windows Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Power Windows The power window controls are located on the side of both front doors and the rear doors The driver s door has a switch for the passenger windows as well Your power windows will work when the ignition is in ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power in the Index Press the rear of the switch with the power window symbol on it to lower the window or the front to raise it Express Down Window All power windows have this feature This allows the windows to be lowered without holding the switch Press and hold the rear of the window switch briefly to activate the express down mode The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pressing the opposite side of the switch To open the window partway lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position Rear Window Lockout The power window switches have a lockout feature This feature prevents the passenger wind
239. ntal air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes But they are designed to inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph 14 to 26 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The driver s and right front passenger s frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers side impacts or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant 1 34 The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes A side impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Side impact air bags are not designed to inflate in frontal or near frontal impacts rollovers or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant A side impact air bag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal air bags inflation
240. nything that exceeds the fuse rating Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible with the accessory power outlets and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power plugs NOTICE Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Analog Clock To adjust the analog clock do the following 1 Locate the adjust button on the lower left corner of the clock 2 Push and hold the button to spin the clock hands Release the button before you get to the desired time 3 Push and release the button to increase the time by one minute intervals until the desired time is reached Sun Visors To block out glare you can swing down the top and bottom visors You can also swing the bottom visor from side to side Your visors may have an extension that can be pulled out for additional glare protection Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps There is a slide switch to adjust the intensity of the lamps 2 57 OnStar System If Equipped OnStar is a vehicle communications system that offers a variety of services and provides a hands free communication link between you and the OnStar Center A
241. of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
242. om road hazards overinflation is all right It s not If your tires Whento Check don t have enough air underinflation you can Check your tires once a month or more Also check the get the following tire pressure of the spare tire Too much flexing How to Check Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture NOTICE Continued 6 50 Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools in the Index The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Service
243. on see Secondary Information Center SIC in the Index Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal 2 38 There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off set the parking brake while the ignition is off Then start your vehicle The automatic headlamp system will stay off until you release the parking brake As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it You may be able to turn off your Automatic Headlamp System and Daytime Running Lamps DRL See Daytime Running Lamps DRL later in this section for more information Lamps On Reminder A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition is in OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY To disable the chime turn the thumbwheel all the way dow
244. ons the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages So you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a Skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steeri
245. ont of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available 4 14 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver OFF ROAD RECOVERY Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway
246. ontacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires 6 57 Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too 6 58 Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth Cleaning of Fabric Carpet Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index He
247. op Tail Lamp Back Up Lamp Sidemarker Lamp Use a screwdriver to remove the two screws from the lamp assembly iS Remove the lamp assembly Press the release tab and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp housing The sidemarker lamp does not have a release tab 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the socket Press a new bulb into the socket insert it into the taillamp housing and turn the socket clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks The sidemarker lamp does not have a release tab and therefore will not click when it is installed Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the screws 6 47 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear and cracking See Wiper Blade Check in the Index for more information 6 48 Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways For proper type and length see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in the Index To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the following 1 Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is facing away from the windshield 2 Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver s side of the vehicle 3 Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer I
248. op at each station until you press one of the SEEK arrows again The scan function is inactive if the AM FM mode on the front radio is in use VOL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and counterclockwise to decrease volume Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it The upper VOL knob controls the upper headphone and the lower VOL knob controls the lower headphone TAPE CD Press this button to switch between the tape and CD changer if all are loaded Press AM FM to return to the radio when a cassette tape or CD is playing The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening P SET PROG The front passengers must be listening to something different for each of these functions to work Press this button to seek through the preset radio stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio When a cassette tape is playing press this button to go to the other side of the tape When a CD is playing in the CD changer press this button to select a disc Compact Disc Changer The compact disc changer plays up to six standard size CDs continuously Individual CDs may be loaded into or ejected from any position A green light on each numbered button indicates a CD is loaded in the respective position An amber light on a numbered button indicates that a CD is playing When loading CDs the loading slot indicators turn amber
249. or above the FILL COLD mark If it isn t you may have a leak in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle NOTICE Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn t covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode in the Index NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty If there seems to be no leak start the engine again See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down If it doesn t your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine 5 13 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level
250. oss a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn t mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over Driving across an incline that s too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline don t drive across it Find another route instead 4 27 Q What if I m driving across an incline that s not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should I do A If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you re crossing an incline be sure you and your passengers get out on
251. ot cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of tow haul when the vehicle is unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight Vehicle Axle Max kGCWR Ratio Trailer Wt 2WD 3 73 7 700 lbs 13 000 Ibs 5 3L 3 493 kg 5 897 kg AWD 3 73 8 500 lbs 14 000 Ibs 6 0L 3 855 kg 6 350 kg Weight distributing hitch tongue weight 10 to 15 of trailer weight 1 000 Ibs 454 kg maximum The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment a
252. ot clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a full strength glass cleaning liquid The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cleaning products from you
253. otection against freezing 6 31 Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment toward the front of the See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full 6 32 vehicle on the driver s side NOTICE When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Don t mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for the location of the reservoir There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that flu
254. ou you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new belts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new belts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to
255. ow to the radiator and the auxiliary transmission oil cooler A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis see Scheduled Maintenance in the Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals 2 85 LOW COOLANT Message This message is displayed when the cooling system is low on coolant LOW COOLANT The engine may overheat See Engine Coolant in the Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as you can CHECK COOLANT TEMP Message This message is displayed when the cooling system temperature gets hot CHECK COOLANT TEMP Check the coolant temperature gage and the coolant level See Engine Coolant and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage in the Index See Engine Overheating in the Index for further information 2 86 ENGINE OVERHEATED Message ENGINE OVER This message is displayed when the cooling system temperature gets too hot HEATED This message will be displayed after the air conditioning system has automatically turned off for the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating in the Index for further information REDUCED ENGINE POWER Message This message is displayed when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode REDUCED ENGINE
256. own Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best The A C button below the mode knob allows the air coming into your vehicle to be cooled This setting is useful for normal cooling on hot days When you use A C with the recirculation button pressed in turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature Using A C with the recirculation setting active allows the air inside your vehicle to be recirculated This setting helps to maximize your air conditioner s performance and your vehicle s fuel economy This setting also cools air the fastest and can be used to keep unwanted odors and or dust from entering the vehicle When using the air conditioner turn off the recirculation setting and use the outside air setting after the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature When the right knob on the control panel is between floor and defrost the recirculation feature will not function to reduce window fogging Passenger Compartment Air Filter Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger compartment air filter which filters outside air entering the vehicle For information on replacing the filter see Passenger Compartment Air Filter in the Index Heating The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it On cold days use the floor setting with the temperature knob in the red area On cold days approximately 32 F 0 C or lower you
257. ows from operating except from the driver s position when the button labeled WINDOW LOCK is engaged When the button is not engaged the passenger windows will operate normally Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children Your vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition and all door locks as well as the spare tire hoist lock Your vehicle also has a key that locks and unlocks the center floor console only If you ever lose your keys your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining replacements In an emergency contact roadside assistance See Cadillac Roadside Service in the Index for more information Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle Use the keyless entry system You can also use your key To lock the doors from the Unlocked doors can be dangerous inside slide the manual lever rearward To unlock the door slide the manual lever forward Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle won t open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked So wear safety belts properly a
258. p on a device know as a dolly With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing following Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Do you have the proper towing equipment See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations e Is your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you ll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip in the Index 4 45 Dinghy Towing Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Only Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed To properly tow these vehicles they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground In rare cases when it s unavoidable that a two wheel drive vehicle is to be towed with all four wheels on the ground the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft removed following the applicable service manual removal insta
259. play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS ABS is an advanced electronic brak
260. police or delivery service Continued 7 15 Scheduled Maintenance 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Continued If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test PF the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 16 Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index for further detail
261. possible first The defogger will shut itself off after several minutes If you need additional warming time press the button again You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the button If your vehicle is equipped with heated outside mirrors the rear window defogger button will also activate the heated outside mirrors Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window NOTICE Don t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use outside air to direct outside air through your vehicle Air will flow through the instrument panel outlets Your vehicle s ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving With the side windows closed air will flow into the front air inlet grilles through the vehicle and out of the air exhaust valves Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the air conditioning fan is running unless you have the recirculation button pressed in For more information on the recirculation button see Air Conditioning earlier in this section Your vehicle has air outlets in the center and on the sides of the instrument panel You can move the ou
262. r axle and all wheel drive help make it much better suited for off road use than a conventional passenger car Its higher ground clearance also helps your vehicle step over some off road obstacles But your vehicle doesn t have features like special underbody shielding and a transfer case low gear range things that are usually thought necessary for extended or severe off road service This guide is for operating your vehicle off paved roads Also see Anti Lock Brakes in the Index Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you ve left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes aren t marked Curves aren t banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you ve gone right back to nature 4 18 Off road driving involves some new skills And that s why it s very important that you read this guide You ll find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if so equipped are properly attached Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What a
263. r dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle 6 61 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks 6 62 Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finis
264. r headlamps need horizontal left right adjustment follow the horizontal aiming procedure If you believe your headlamps need only vertical up down adjustment follow only the vertical aiming procedure Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx socket or T15 Torx screwdriver Headlamp Horizontal Aiming Headlamp Vertical Aiming Turn the horizontal aiming screw A until the indicator B is lined up with zero NOTICE Horizontal aiming must be performed before making any adjustments to the vertical aim Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an incorrect headlamp aim 1 Find the aim dot on the lens of the low beam lamps Once the horizontal aim is adjusted then adjust the vertical aim 6 43 At the wall or other flat surface measure from the ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2 and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of the vehicle 2 Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot on each low beam lamp Record this distance 6 44 4 Turn on the low beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being aimed This should allow only the beam of light from the headlamp being aimed to be seen on the flat surface NOTICE Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut off when aiming Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build up whi
265. r headlamps need to be re aimed we recommend that you take your vehicle to your dealer for service However it is possible for you to re aim your headlamps as described in the following procedure NOTICE To make sure your headlamps are aimed properly read all the instructions before beginning Failure to follow these instructions could cause damage to headlamp parts The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft 7 6 m from a light colored wall or other flat surface The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly level surface which is level all the way to the wall or other flat surface The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface 6 41 The vehicle should not have any snow ice or mud attached to it The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 Ibs 75 kg on the driver s seat Tires should be properly inflated Start the vehicle and rock it to level the suspension Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low beam lamps The high beam lamps will be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps are aimed properly The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near the headlamps 6 42 If you believe you
266. r may require replacement more often Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote 37 500 Miles 62 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 10 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Replace passenger compartment air filter If you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outsi
267. r qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle Keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs yow ll know that GM trained and supported service people will pe
268. r service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait Cadillac helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum of 37 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement a
269. rack to the front of my vehicle will it keep the air bags from working properly A As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle s basic structure isn t changed it s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash Q Is there anything I might add to the front or sides of the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end or side sheet metal or height they may keep the air bag system from working properly Also the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure in the Index 1 37 Rear Seat Passengers Lap Shoulder Belt It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear belts Here s how to wear one properly seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety bel
270. rademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it vi CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE XN J We support voluntary technician certification For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual Aux propri taires canadiens Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais chez votre concessionaire ou au Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle In this manual you ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things
271. re are some cleaning tips e Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set Carefully scrape off any excess stain Use aclean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn Ifaring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see throu
272. re the local laws that apply to off roading where you ll be driving If you don t know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain doesn t toss things around Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible You ll find other important information in this manual See Vehicle Loading Luggage Carrier and Tires in the Index Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satis
273. rence the following topics in the index Engine Compartment Overview Instrument Panel Comfort Controls Audio Systems Also see Warning Lights and Gages in the Index Here are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle These symbols are used on an original battery CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING CAUSTIC BATTERY ACID COULD CAUSE BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES A z SPARK OR These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS TO PROTECT OCCUPANT DO NOT TWIST SAFETY BELT WHEN ATTACHING FASTEN SEAT BELTS MOVE SEAT FULLY REARWARD SECURE CHILD SEAT Ys PULL BELT OUT COMPLETELY THEN SECURE a CHILD SEAT power a winpow __ CHILD RESTRAINT B AIR BAG X DO NOT INSTALL A REAR FACING QW IN THIS SEATING POSITION e DO NOT INSTALL A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING POSITION DOOR LOCK UNLOCK These symbols have to do with vehicle lamps These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights MASTER s LIGHTING SWITCH r Q gt p A 3O D ENGINE COOLANT TEMP TURN SIGNALS BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM siai ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 7 6 PARKING LAMPS HAZARD WARNING FLASHER DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS ANTI LOCK BRAKES Here are some other symbols you may
274. rform the work using genuine GM parts The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle This schedule is for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotat
275. right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint See Seats in the Index 2 Put the restraint on the seat 1 61 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 62 6 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child r
276. rinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle 4 6 Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all
277. riven over an extremely rough road the system will turn off and the light will come on The light will go off a few seconds after the rough road conditions go away or when the vehicle comes to a complete stop This is normal operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light in the United States or Check Engine Light in Canada SERVICE ENGINE SOON United States Canada Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems 2 77 This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty 2 78 NOTICE Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intak
278. rm a check of the engine on board computer An advisor can then recommend what action needs to be taken 2 59 OnStar MED NET Med Net can store your personal medical history and provide it to emergency personnel if necessary Requires activation and an additional fee Accident Assist An advisor can provide step by step guidance following an accident Remote Door Unlock To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to unlock itself The advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle Remote Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is parked to maintain the battery charge Vehicle Locator Service To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn and or flash the lamps In order to provide you with excellent service calls with the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded 2 60 Premium Services Includes Safety and Security Services Route Support An advisor can provide directions or guidance to anywhere you want to go In addition they can help you locate gas stations rest areas ATMs hospitals hotels stores eateries and more Concierge Services The concierge advisor can obtain tickets reservations or help with vacation trip planning and other unique items and services Ride Assist An
279. rom driving in flat or rolling terrain 4 39 If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Operating Your Vehicle Off Paved Roads in the Index for information about driving off road Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have 2 Keep your yehiclem good shape Check all Thid to do all the work of slowing down They could levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an acci
280. rom the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the red positive remote terminal cover to its original position Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance and Recreational Vehicle Towing in the Index Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage in the Index In addition you will find a LOW COOLANT CHECK COOLANT TEMP ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER message in the message center on the instrument panel See Message Center in the Index Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided NOTICE After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oi
281. rong with this You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it 4 3 A i as D SGIAN i J The belt is twisted across the body 1 27 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle 1 28 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety be
282. s Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures Don t forget to check your spare tire See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced 7 17 Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper
283. s in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Don t include the spare tire in your tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification Tire label Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index 6 51 When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split T
284. s like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Don t leave a seat folded down unless you need to There s also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving in the Index 4 49 Level Control The automatic level control rear suspension comes as a part of the Autoride suspension See Autoride in the Index for more information This type of level control is fully automatic and will provide a better leveled riding position as well as better handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions An air compressor connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height The system is activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter The system may exhaust lower vehicle height for up to ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned to OFF You may hear the air compressor operating when the height is being adjusted If a self equalizing hitch is being used it is recommended to allow the shocks to inflate thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch 4 50 Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and drive properly you
285. s and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle 3 2 Comfort Controls 3 15 Rear Seat Audio RSA 3 2 Electronic Climate Control System 3 17 Compact Disc Changer 3 7 Air Conditioning 3 20 Theft Deterrent Feature 3 7 Heating 3 22 Audio Steering Wheel Control 3 8 Defogging and Defrosting 3 23 Understanding Radio Reception 3 8 Rear Window Defogger 3 23 Tips About Your Audio System 3 9 Ventilation System 3 24 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 10 Audio Systems 3 26 Care of Your Compact Discs 3 11 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape 3 26 Care of Your Compact Disc Changer Player Bose 3 26 Diversity Antenna Comfort Controls Fan Knob The knob on the left side of the electronic climate control panel is used to regulate the fan speed To manually increase airflow move the knob clockwise To manually decrease airflow move it counterclockwise OFF If the knob is in OFF outside air will still enter the vehicle and will be directed based on the position of the mode knob AUTO If the knob is in AUTO the fan speed will vary as the system maintains the selected temperature When both the fan knob and mode knob are in the AUTO position the system will then automatically maintain the desired cabin temperature as selected by the temperature knob Manual operation is also availa
286. s during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from home why should I wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone 1 21 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called
287. s it again to turn the RSA display off PR Press this button to turn RSA on or off The light to the right of the button will illuminate to indicate that RSA is on The following functions are controlled by the RSA system buttons PWR Press this button to turn RSA on or off 3 16 AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 If the front passengers are already listening to AM FM the RSA controller will not switch between the bands and cannot change the frequency A SEEK V While listening to the radio press the up arrow to tune to the next station and stay there Press the down arrow to tune to the previous station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking The SEEK button is inactive if the AM FM mode on the front radio is in use While listening to a cassette tape press the up arrow to hear the next selection on the tape Press the down arrow to go back to the previous selection The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use While listening to a CD press the up arrow to hear the next selection on the CD Press the down arrow to go back to the start of the current selection if more than eight seconds have played The SEEK button is inactive in the CD mode if the CD changer is in use Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows until the radio goes into the scan mode Scan allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily st
288. s of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP you can play your audio system even after the ignition is off See Retained Accessory Power RAP in the Index AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Bose Included with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player is a six disc CD changer It is equipped with ten Bose high performance speakers an Acoustimass bass module and a seven channel Bose amplifier Please see your dealer for details Playing the Radio PWR VOL Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of being turned continuously SCV Your system has a feature called Speed Compensated Volume SCV With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to
289. s on your steering wheel You can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel PROG Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons on the selected band If a cassette tape is playing press this button to play the other side of the tape If a compact disc is playing in the CD changer press this button to go to the next available CD A SEEK V Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing the player will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the down arrow MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again to turn on the sound A VOL V Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late Your he
290. s the incline of the hill A hill that s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you don t drive straight down Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade 4 26 Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake Shift to PARK P and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine won t start get out and get help Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider e A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive acr
291. se differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible 4 31 You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some dr
292. se handle while pulling the seat out 5 While holding the rear of the seat up roll the seat out of the vehicle 1 14 Replacing the Rear Seats Once the latches are engaged let the seat drop into place Release the lever labeled 1 and pull the seatback up using the assist strap on the outboard side of the seat to return it to its upright position A seat that isn t locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it To put a seat back in do the following 1 While holding the rear of the seat up slide the front 3 Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked wheels into the slots on the floor The front latches into place The seatback cannot be raised to the should lock into place If latches do not lock upright position unless the seat is secured to try tilting the rear of the seat upwards the floor 1 15 Heated Rear Seats 2nd Row The controls are located on the back of the center console The ignition must be in RUN for this feature to operate To activate the heated seats press the button once for the HI heat setting Press the button again for the LO heat setting To turn off the heated seats press the button a third time An indicator light on the button will illuminate for each heat setting anytime the heated seats are operating The heated seats will be cancel
293. seat audio system See Rear Seat Audio in the Index for more information Cupholders Your vehicle is equipped with cupholders for the front and rear passengers The cupholders are located located in the center console and on the rear of the center console storage area To use the front cupholders press down on the raised lines of the access door To access the rear cupholders pull down on the door located on the back of the console 2 51 Cargo Security Shade An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured If you remove the cover always store it outside of the vehicle When you put it back always be sure that it is securely reattached If you have a cargo security shade you can use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle To use the shade do the following 1 Pull the shade handle toward the rear of the vehicle 2 Latch the shade posts into the retaining sockets on the cargo area trim panels 2 52 To return the shade to the retracted position do the following 1 Pull up on the shade handle to release the shade posts from the retaining sockets 2 Let the shade move forward to the full retracted position To remove the shade from the vehicle do the following 1 Let the shade go all the way into the holder 2 Then grasping the passenger s side shade endcap push the shade endcap toward the driv
294. see VENTILATING OWNER S MANUAL oS y AR service J SERVICE MANUAL Service Station Guide Cooling System Tire Pressure See Section 5 Engine Oil Dipstick See Section 6 See Section 6 Spare Tire Pressure See Section 6 For a More Detailed Look at What s Under the Hood See Section 6 of Hood Release See Section 6 a in Windshield Washer Fuel Fluid Use unleaded only See Section 6 Battery See Section 6 See Section 6 for octane ratings Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts 1 2 Seats and Seat Controls 1 40 1 16 Safety Belts They re for Everyone 1 21 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About 1 43 Safety Belts and the Answers 1 44 2 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 48 2 Driver Position 1 64 8 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 67 1 29 Right Front Passenger Position 1 67 9 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 1 67 8 Rear Seat Passengers Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Center Passenger Position Children Restraint Systems for Children Older Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats how to adjust them and fold th
295. service subscription agreement and fee are required in order to receive OnStar service Services are available 24 hours a day 7 days a week For more information call 1 888 ONSTAR 7 1 888 667 8277 2 58 OnStar Services Button Press this button once to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with these services If you are not quickly connected the system will automatically reset and redial This ensures connection to the center there is no additional action required Press the Call Answer End button to cancel the automatic redial Emergency Button In an emergency situation press the emergency service button Upon receiving the call an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and assess the situation If necessary the advisor will alert the nearest emergency service provider Call ANSWER END Button Use this button to answer a call If you are receiving a call the audio system will mute and the ring will be heard Press this button at the end of a call to disconnect and return the audio system to its previous settings This button will also cancel a call if one of the buttons is accidentally pressed or if the automatic redial function is activated Volume Control You can control the volume of the OnStar System using either the volume control knob on the radio or using the steering wheel controls if equipped Telltale Light This light will indicate the status of the system A solid green light wi
296. sion fluid level High transmission fluid level Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary transmission oil cooler A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis see Scheduled Maintenance in the Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE Message Your vehicle has a transmission over temperature display contained in the message center If this warning message is displayed pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE Set the parking brake and place the transmission in PARK P Idle the engine until the message center no longer displays a message If idling the engine does not turn the warning message off after 10 to 15 minutes contact your nearest dealer or the GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Service in the Index NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with the transmission TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE message displayed you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered under your warranty The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures Towing a trailer Hot outside air temperatures Hauling a heavy load Low transmission fluid level High transmission fluid level Restricted air fl
297. ssion Temperature Gage Canada United States When your ignition is on the gage shows the temperature of the transmission fluid The normal operating range is from 100 F 38 C to about 265 F 130 C At approximately 265 F 130 C the message center will display a TRANS FLUID HOT message and the transmission will enter a transmission protection mode When the transmission enters the protection mode you may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns The transmission will return to normal shifting patterns when the transmission fluid temperature falls below 260 F 127 C See Message Center in the Index for further information If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of approximately 275 F 135 C or greater the message center will display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENG warning message Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so Set the parking brake place the transmission in PARK P and allow the engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls below 260 F 127 C If the transmission continues to operate above 265 F 130 C please contact your nearest dealer or the Roadside Service Center NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with the transmission temperature gage above the normal operating range you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered under your warranty
298. stem performs several diagnostic checks to insure that there are no problems The green light near the Stabilitrak switch will turn on when the diagnostic checks are complete and the stability enhancement system is ready to activate if needed The light will come on only after the vehicle reaches a speed of at least 10 mph The STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message will come on when the system is operating See Message Center in the Index for more information You may also feel or hear the system working This is normal 4 11 If your vehicle is in cruise control when the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message appears the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may reengage the cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index The Stabilitrak button located to the right steering wheel on the instrument panel can be pressed to put the Stabilitrak system in LIMITED mode The Stabilitrak system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle When the switch is pressed the STABILITY SYSTEM LIMITED message is displayed in the message center While in LIMITED mode traction control is disabled and the stability 4 12 system is less likely to activate The stability system can still activate in LIMITED mode if the vehicle starts to spin but it will not activate as quickly as when the system is not in LIMITED mode You should put Stabilitrak in the LIMITED mode
299. t Press the button again to turn the lamp off 2 42 Your vehicle also has reading lamps for the rear passenger locations To turn a lamp on or off press the button located next to the lamp The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted Dome Lamps The dome lamps will come on when you open a door and will slowly dim to off when all doors are closed You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel located next to the headlamp and parking lamp knob all the way up In this position the dome lamps will remain on whether a door is opened or closed You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button located below the headlamp parking lamp knob to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened or remain off To turn the lamps off press the button into the in position With the button in this position the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again and return it to the out position With the button in this position the dome lamps will come on when you open a door Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome reading glove box and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off This will keep your battery from running down Mirrors Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display When on an electrochromic mirror automaticall
300. t alarm system With this system the SECURITY message will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off SECURITY This message reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system Here s how to do it 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter The SECURITY message should come on and stay on If using the remote keyless entry transmitter the door does not need to be open 3 Close all doors The SECURITY message should go off after approximately 15 seconds The alarm is not armed until the SECURITY message goes off If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off 2 14 Depending on how you have programmed the alarm in the SIC your vehicle s horn may sound the headlamps may flash or both the headlamps and the horn will activate See Secondary Information Center SIC in the Index for more information Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with the door open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should
301. t can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you 6 64 Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this Cadillac will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 1052929 16 oz 0 473 L Chrome and Wire Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers 12377964 16 oz 0 473 L Finish Enhancer Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on wipe off 12377965 16 oz 0 473 L Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks fine scratches and other light surface contamination 12377966 16 oz 0 473 L Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects fi
302. t of the steering wheel on the instrument panel TC If you used the button to turn the system off the TRAC OFF light will come on and stay on You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again The TRAC OFF light should go off If desired you can change the TCS automatic engagement feature so that the system will not come on automatically when the engine is started To do so 1 Park the vehicle with the ignition off and the transmission in PARK P 2 Turn the ignition to RUN do not start the engine 3 Apply the brake pedal press the accelerator pedal to the floor and then press the TCS on off button and hold it down for at least six seconds 4 Release the TCS button and both pedals 5 Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds The next time you start your vehicle the TCS will not automatically come on You can restore the automatic feature by using the same procedure Whether the TCS is set to come on automatically or not you can always turn the system on or off by pressing the TCS on off button Stabilitrak System All Wheel Drive Your vehicle may have the Stabilitrak system which helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions This is accomplished by selectively applying either of the vehicle s front brakes and or momentarily reducing engine power When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away the Stabilitrak sy
303. t discs and loose change It is also equipped with an accessory power outlet See Accessory Power Outlets later in this section for more information To access the cell phone storage area press the button on the front of the console An access lid will pop up To store a cell phone place it inside the net on the inside of the access lid 2 49 Center Console Storage Area Access Door 2 50 If you ever drop something between the cupholder door and the center console area you can easily remove it by following these steps 1 Open the center console storage area by pressing the button on the side of the console lid 2 Locate the access door inside the storage area toward the front 3 Press the release edge on the access door and pull it out You should now be able to retrieve the lost item s Reverse the procedure to reinstall the access door Rear Storage Compartment Your vehicle has a storage compartment located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver s side trim panel To open the compartment pull the latch to access Rear Armrest Storage Compartment Your vehicle s second row seat has an armrest storage compartment Pull the loop at the top of the armrest up and then out to lower the armrest To open the compartment push the button on the front of the armrest and pull the top open Inside you will find a small storage area and two sets of earbud headphones for use with the rear
304. t the strap be anchored In the United States some child restraints also have a top strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under it Once you have the top strap anchored you ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer s instructions say A child restraint with a top strap should only be used in the second row Don t use a child restraint with a top strap in the right front passenger s position or in the third row because there s no place to anchor the top strap An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position Children LATCH System in the second row Your vehicle may have the LATCH system If it does you ll find anchors A where the seatback meets the seat cushion in the outboard positions for the second row seats Second Row Seat 1 53 In order to use the system you need either a forward facing child restraint that has attaching points B at its base and a top tether anchor C or a rear facing child restraint that has attaching points B as shown here
305. tario K1A ON5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 458 8006 or write Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 8 11 2002 CADILLAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check money order or credit card information to Helm Incorporated address below CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2002 CADILLAC SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 120 00 TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for the 2002 GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 SERVICE BULLETINS Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably
306. teps 1 Press the eject symbol upward pointing arrow button The buttons with loaded CDs will blink amber Press one of the amber blinking buttons to select the location of the CD you want to eject The changer will move to that location and eject the CD If you do not remove the CD from the player within ten seconds it will be reloaded If the eject button is pressed and a numbered location button is not pressed within five seconds the current or last played CD will be ejected To eject all CDs press and hold the eject button There are two ways to play a CD Perform one of the following Press the desired numbered button with a green indicator light on the CD changer Press the CHANGER button on the radio The CD changer will go to its last played position 1 PREV Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to go to the previous track if the current selection has been playing for less than eight seconds If the PREV 1 button is pressed and the current selection has been playing for more than eight seconds it will go to the beginning of the current selection If you hold or press this button more than once the player will continue moving back through the CD The sound will mute while seeking 2 PROG Press this button to select a CD The CD number and track number will be displayed 3 NEXT Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to go to the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the
307. ter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter 1 Insert a thin coin in the slot between the covers of the transmitter housing near the key ring hole Remove the bottom by twisting the coin 2 Remove and replace the battery with a three volt CR2032 or equivalent battery positive side up 3 Align the covers and snap them together 4 Check the operation of the transmitter NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter 2 11 Liftgate Liftglass It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or liftglass open because carbon monoxide CO
308. tery feed fuse This harness and fuse should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center 4 61 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 12 Cooling System Other Warning Devices 5 19 Engine Fan Noise Jump Starting 5 19 If a Tire Goes Flat Towing Your Vehicle 5 20 Changing a Flat Tire Engine Overheating 5 35 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off But they won t flash if you re braking The hazard warning flasher button is located on the top of the steering column Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off To turn the flashers off press the button until the first click and release When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals won t work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can use them to warn others Set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle But please use the following steps to do it safely NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn
309. the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper If you have the factory installed trailering package for vehicles equipped to pull a trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 855 kg you may attach the safety chains to the attaching point on the hitch platform Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 2 000 Ibs 900 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure The trailer s brake system will use less than 0 02 cubic inch 0 3 cc of fluid from your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brakes If everything checks out this far make the brake tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off Use steel brake tubing 4 55 Driving with a Trailer If you have a rear most window open and you pull a trailer with your v
310. the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over yov ll be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over 4 28 Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels won t get good traction You can t accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you Il need longer braking distances It s best to use a low gear when you re in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don t get stuck When you drive on sand you ll sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand This will improve traction Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it s very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the tractio
311. three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up Ill be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been d
312. til you hit a spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers If You re Caught in a Blizzard Se E ee If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers a e R Tie ared cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially
313. timer on or off The RESET button will reset the timer to 00 00 00 If turned on the timer will accumulate whenever the SIC is powered the engine does not have to be running The timer will rollover after 99 59 59 Vehicle History Last 15 Days The first press of the arrow button will display the maximum speed and accumulated mileage for the current day Every press of the arrow button after will display the maximum speed and accumulated mileage for the previous day This feature requires the date and time to be set correctly Refer to the setting of day date time under the MENU button explained later in this section Annual Mileage The annual mileage displayed is the mileage accumulated since the annual mileage was reset Pressing the RESET button will reset the annual mileage to 0 Pressing the arrow button will display the ratio of personal trip computer mileage to annual mileage as a percent Pressing the arrow button again will display the ratio of business trip computer mileage to annual mileage as a percent Menu Press the MENU button to choose a feature you would like to personalize the features are listed below Each press of the button will display a new item that can be personalized Use the arrow button to choose the setting you would like to use within the chosen feature For example Say you would like to personalize the automatic door locks so that the automatic locking feature is disa
314. tion devices called Text Telephone TTY in the Roadside Service Center Any customer who has access to a TTY ora conventional teletypewriter can communicate with Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada 1 888 889 2438 daily 24 hours Courtesy Transportation Cadillac has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during watranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off fo
315. tion under MENU Do OOOO Fuel Each press of the FUEL button will change the display between the fuel remaining range average fuel economy instantaneous fuel economy and a blank display J A The average fuel economy can be reset using the RESET button 2 91 Trip Each press of the TRIP button will change the display between personal trip computer business trip computer timer vehicle history annual mileage and a blank display Personal Trip Computer and Business Trip Computer Each press of the arrow button will change the display between turn on off trip odometer fuel used average fuel economy and average speed The ON OFF button will turn the trip computer on and off The information on the trip computer only gets updated when it is turned on The personal and business computers are independent i e turning one of them on does not turn the other off All information associated with the trip computer will be reset when the RESET button is pressed If the RESET button is pressed and held for more than two seconds all of the trip computer settings will reset starting from the last ignition cycle turning the ignition from OFF to RUN This feature is for someone who has forgotten to reset the trip computer when pulling out of the driveway and does not realize it until after driving for awhile 2 92 Timer Each press of the ON OFF button will turn the
316. tlets from side to side or up and down to direct the flow of air The driver s and passenger s side outlets have shut off thumbwheels Turn the thumbwheels to the left to shut off air flow or to the right to allow air flow When you close an outlet it will increase the flow of air coming out of any outlets that are open The center outlet does not completely shut off airflow Your vehicle also has outlets located on the headliner for the rear seat passengers To use these vents press on the individual slats to open the vent Turn the entire vent in the direction you want to direct airflow Push the slats to close them and block airflow 3 9 Ventilation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows When you enter a vehicle in cold weather turn the fan knob all the way to the right for a few moments before driving This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle The use of non GM approved hood air deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system 3 10 Audio Systems Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and give year
317. tons until the indicator light on HomeLink begins to flash rapidly this may take up to 90 seconds If you have trouble programming HomeLink make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described and that the battery in the hand held transmitter is not weak If you still cannot program it move the hand held transmitter to the left or right or forward or backward or flip it upside down HomeLink may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts refer to Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes later in this section or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Be sure to keep the original hand held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram HomeLink 2 63 Training a Garage Opener with a Rolling Code Feature If Equipped If you have not previously programmed the hand held transmitter to HomeLink see Programming the HomeLink Transmitter listed previously If you have completed this programming already you now need to train the garage door opener motor head unit to recognize HomeLink 1 Find the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener motor head unit The exact location and color will vary by garage door opener brand If you have difficulty finding the Learn or Smart button refer to
318. trical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow etc be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and
319. trol both the fan and mode knobs in AUTO you still have the ability to override any function However continually overriding the outside air or the A C compressor will limit the ability of the system to cool the vehicle quickly If you push a button for a function which is not available the light next to that button will flash three times to alert you that it s not available To find your comfort zone start with the 74 setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to adjust the temperature if necessary With the automatic setting the air conditioning compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool the air In cold weather when the system senses the need for heat the airflow will be directed out of the floor outlets As the interior temperature approaches a desired setting the fan speed will decrease To maintain interior comfort the airflow will adjust between the instrument panel air outlets and floor outlets On bright sunny days in cool weather the airflow may come out of the air conditioning and floor outlets bi level mode to maintain comfort and prevent stuffiness To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the outside air temperature engine coolant temperature or the time since the engine was last started As the coolant warms up the fan speed will gradually increase and air will flow from the floor outle
320. try where you ll be driving Filling Your Tank Gasoline vapor is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries Don t smoke if you re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from gasoline The fuel cap is located on the driver s side of your vehicle 6 6 While refueling hang the fuel cap by the tether using the hook located on the inside of the filler door To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill gasoline Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index When you put the fuel cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index NOTICE If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer
321. ts Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure 1 38 If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part SS A M4 Ay iB 4 XY tik D Ve pe LOK LQ i ayy x The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash 1 39 You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To unlatch the belt just push t
322. ts with some airflow to the windshield to prevent fogging under most normal conditions Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor located near the center of the instrument panel This sensor is used by the automatic system to regulate temperature 3 3 Mode Knob Manual Operation The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery You can choose to set the climate control system operations yourself or let the system work for you by placing the system in AUTO mode See Mode Knob Automatic Operation earlier in this section gt o A Vent This setting directs most of the air through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through the floor outlets gt o Vad Bi level This setting delivers air through the floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets e tyd Floor This setting directs most of the warmed air through the floor outlets and some air through the windshield defroster outlets We Vad Blend This setting divides airflow equally between the floor outlets and the windshield defroster outlets The air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging QW Defrost This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster outlets and some through the floor outlets The air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging When using the defrost mode with auto fan sp
323. ty of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Your vehicle is provided with a button at the end of the shift lever which when pressed enables tow haul When the button is pressed a light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that tow haul has been selected 4 52 Tow haul may be turned off by pressing the button again at which time the indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off The vehicle will automatically turn off tow haul every time it is started Tow haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer later in this section Tow haul is most useful under the following driving conditions When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired Operating the vehicle in tow haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will n
324. ult in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications 6 35 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear 6 36 down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance
325. ur vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You l find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Tire Loading in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 2 000 Ibs 900 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you re driving Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle See Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too 4 54 _ lt oey i Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by
326. use SCV turn the control all the way down Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds REAR DSPL When the main radio is turned on press this button to turn on the rear seat audio display on the main radio Press it again to turn the rear seat audio display off PR Press this button to turn rear seat audio on or off The light to the right of the button will illuminate to indicate that rear seat audio is on 3 11 Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it lt SEEK D To seek press the right arrow to tune to the next station and the left arrow to tune to the previous station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking To scan press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display Scan allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again The sound will mute while scanning P SCAN The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons Select either the AM FM1 or FM2 mode and then press P SCAN It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
327. ust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings 2 45 To adjust for compass variance do the following 1 Use the COMP button located at the bottom of the mirror 2 Press and hold the COMP button for three seconds until a zone number appears in the display 3 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map 2 46 4 Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display After you stop pressing the button in the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors Heated The controls for the mirrors are located on the driver s door armrest Move the upper control to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to adjust then press the arrows located on the lower control to adjust the mirror in the direction you want the mirror to go The mirrors include ground illumination lamps puddle lamps in the base of the mirror These lamps will light the area near the front doors The lamps are activated when the remote keyless entry is operated or the door handle is pulled The lamps will time out or turn off once the engine is started When you operate the rear window defogger it also warms both outside mirrors to help clear them of fog
328. utomatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index When the TRAC OFF light is on the TCS is off and will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly TRAC OFF The TRAC OFF light will come on under the following conditions The Traction Control System is turned off either by pressing the TCS on off button or turning off the automatic engagement feature of the TCS The transmission is in FIRST 1 TCS will not operate in this gear This is normal 4 10 The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road When the vehicle leaves the rough surface slows down or stops the light will go off and TCS will be on again This is normal e A Traction Control System Anti Lock Brake System or engine related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See Traction Off Light in the Index The Traction Control System as delivered from the factory will automatically come on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the TCS off if you ever need to You should turn the TCS off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index To turn the system on or off press the TCS on off button located to the righ
329. ver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details When calling from outside Canada please dial 1 905 644 3063 All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Service BS ada Br Service TOLL FREE HOTLINE 1 800 882 1112 Cadillac s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service It provides every Cadillac owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and where available a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on site service Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs Cadillac Roadside Service can be reached by dialing Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the 1 800 882 1112 24 hours a day 365 days a year following situations This service is provided at no charge for any ae Towing Service warranty covered situation and for a nominal charge 8 if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty Roadside Battery Jump Starting Service is available only in the United States e Lock Out Assistance and Canada _ Fue
330. ver toward you but not so far that you hear it click 2 32 If your headlamps are off or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They II stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you and the high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to turn the high beam headlamps off Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it For a single wiping cycle turn the band to MIST Hold it there until the wipers start then let go The wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on MIST longer You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to LO the shorter the delay For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to LO To stop the wipers move the band to OFF Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Windshield Washer There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed In freezing weather don t use your
331. w water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and the other vehicle occupants could drown Don t ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Turn on your low beam headlamps not just your parking lamps to help make you more visible to others Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires in the Index 4 35 City Driving 4 36 One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns
332. washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Rear Window Washer Wiper This control is located on the instrument panel To turn the rear wiper on turn the control to either 1 or 2 For long delayed wiping turn the control to 1 For short delayed wiping turn the control to 2 To turn the wiper off turn the control to 0 To wash the window press the control The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer However the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer If you can wash your windshield but not your rear windows check the fluid level For more information see Low Washer Fluid in the Index 2 33 Cruise Control With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about CUPL 25 mph 40 km h or more poll cab sa without keeping your foot H on the accelerator This can l really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h If you apply your brakes the cruise control will disengage 2 34 Cruise control can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Don t use cru
333. wer Power Mirrors Power Door Locks Power Seats Ignition Switch Retained Accessory Power Rear Power Windows Sunroof Radio Accessory Power Trailer Wiring Brake Feed Right Turn Signal Trailer Wiring Left Turn Signal Trailer Wiring Ignition Fuel Controls Ignition Fuel Controls Relay Starter Relay Name PARK LP FRT HVAC STOP LP ECM 1 CHMSL VEH STOP TRL B U INJ A RR HVAC VEH B U ENG 1 ETC IGNE B U LP Usage Parking Lamps Climate Control System Exterior Lamps Stoplamps VCM PCM Center High Mounted Stoplamp Stoplamps Cruise Control Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring Fuel Controls Ignition Rear HVAC Vehicle Backup Lamps Engine Controls Canister Purge Fuel System Electronic Throttle Control A C Compressor Relay Rear Window Defogger Daytime Running Lamps A I R System Backup Lamps Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System 6 73 Name ATC RR DEFOG RTD RR PRK ECM B F PMP 02 A 02 B LR PRK RR DEFOG HDLP TRL PRK PRIME RT HDLP DRL 6 74 Usage Automatic Transfer Case Rear Window Defogger Heated Mirrors Relay Autoride Real Time Damping Right Rear Parking Lamps VCM PCM Fuel Pump Relay Oxygen Sensors Oxygen Sensors Left Rear Parking Lamps Rear Window Defogger Heated Mirrors Headlamps Relay Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring Not Used Right Headlamps Daytime Running Lamps Relay Name HTD MIR LT HDLP A C AUX PWR SEO 2 SEO 1
334. were developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines In Canada look for the Auto Makers Choice label on the pump Canada Only California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards see the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on see Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index and your vehicle may fail a smog check test If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Additives Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such
335. ws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh less than 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads You should tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions See Tow Haul Mode in the Index 4 51 Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle s tires Tow Haul Mode The tow haul feature assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load The purpose of the tow haul mode is to Reduce the frequency and improve the predictabili
336. y dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark E 2 43 The mirror also includes a display of both the compass and the temperature in the upper right corner of the mirror face The dual display can be turned on or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button 5 eam Fae 2 44 Temperature Display Pressing the TEMP button once briefly will toggle the compass temperature reading on and off To alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius press and hold the TEMP button for three seconds until the display blinks F and C Press and release the TEMP button to toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings After five seconds of inactivity the display will stop flashing and stay at the last setting If an abnormal reading is displayed please consult your dealer Electrochromic Mirror Operation The right button labeled TEMP and located at the bottom of the mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on and off An indicator light located to the right of the TEMP button will come on when the electrochromic mirror is turned on To turn the mirror on press and hold the TEMP button for six seconds To turn the mirror off press and hold the TEMP button for six seconds The indicator light will turn off Compass Operation With the ignition on the compass will show two character boxes The mirror will display the compass heading When cle
337. your garage door opener owner s manual or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist in programming the transmitter 2 64 2 Press the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener motor head unit An indicator light will begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the training mode Following this step you have 30 seconds to start Step 3 3 Return to HomeLink in your vehicle and firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button three times The rolling code garage door opener should now recognize HomeLink You may either use HomeLink or the hand held transmitter to open the garage door If after following these instructions you still have problems training the garage door opener contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Canadian Programming Canadian Owners During programming the hand held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after two seconds In this case you should press and hold the HomeLink button see Steps 2 and 3 under Programming the HomeLink Transmitter while you press and repress cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink is trained Operating the HomeLink Transmitter Press and hold the appropriate button on HomeLink for at least a half of a second The indicator

2002 cadillac escalade owner`s manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents